Ccad Control Function Block User Manual 3143

CONTROCAD
Machine Control Function Block Library
USER'S MANUAL
ACCESSIBILITY Free
DATE 2008-10-22
NAME SIGNATURE
CREATED BY C.BARTHOULOT C.B.
CHECKED BY P.BOURCET P.B.
APPROVED BY H.SABOT H.S.
DOCUMENT TYPE
ALSTOM DOCUMENT CODE
REFERENCE LG REV ORIGIN Format Status SH/SH N of SH

Size END
PTP21A40015 en S EMB/PCS/EE2/TC A4 GFE 1/420 420
Copyright © ALSTOM 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.
Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden
Template No.: CS-T-010 Rev.C (Procedure CS-P-009)
REVISION HISTORY
REV CREATED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY DATE DESCRIPTION STAT.
yyyy-mm-dd
M. DROUIN,
A C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2000-07-24 See page 3 GFE
Ph. CHARRON,
Ph. MANIETTE,
B C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2001-04-12 See page 3 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
C C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2001-12-13 See page 4 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
D C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2002-03-13 See page 5 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
E C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2002-05-17 See page 5 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
F C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2002-08-26 See page 5 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
G C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2002-11-18 See page 5 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
H C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2003-03-24 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
I C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2003-10-07 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
J C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2004-01-22 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
K C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2005-06-01 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
L C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2005-06-29 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
M C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2006-02-28 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
N C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2006-05-19 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
O C.BARTHOULOT D.CANTERO 2006-08-17 See page 6 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
P C.BARTHOULOT H.SABOT 2007-08-02 See page 7 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
Ph. MANIETTE,
Q C.BARTHOULOT H.SABOT 2007-09-07 See page 7 GFE
Ph.BOURCET
R C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2007-11-14 See page 7 GFE
R C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2008-05-20 New name of entity EMB GFE
S C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2008-10-22 See page 7 GFE
Copyright © ALSTOM 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without
express authority is strictly forbidden
CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

USER'S MANUAL 2/420
abcd
REVISION HISTORY
Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS

A 05/23/00 Integration block :
DBF,EA2,EQM,FOX,FOTD,GROUP,LTH_B,MAX_WB,
MIN_WB,MO2,MVS_WB,OSL,PREF,SELM,SEQ, SH,SOL1,
SOL2,TIME
A 06/07/00 Details correction for blocks :
1OF2MC, 2OF3MC, LELAGMC
A 06/13/00 Output added for block : LELAGMC
A 06/14/00 Up dating bloc :
DER,FOTD,GAI,MAX_WB,MIN_WB,MVS_WB,OSL,PREF,SEQ,
SELM,SOL1,SOL2,TIME
A 06/19/00 Up dating block : LPMC, PIDMC
A 06/29/00 Up dating block : ANTIBUMP, PIDS
A 07/03/00 Up dating bloc : ATT, DER, EA2, MO2, OSL, SELM, SEQ,
SOL1, SOL2,
A 07/10/00 HL ; LL detection modification and details corrections in blocks :
ANTIBUMP ; CD ; INTGR ; PIDMC ; Details corrections in blocks
1OF2MC ; 2OF3MC ; LELAGMC ; LPMC ; PIDS ; SCI8K ;
SCO8k ; 2 blocks added : DIVMC; MULMC.
A 07/13/00 Up dating block : DBF, EA2 , FOX, GROUP, LTH_B, MO2,
SOL1, SOL2
Rename block FOTD to PT
4 blocks added : OSC, SL2, SL3, SP
A 07/13/00 Rename block ANTIBUMP to FI ; INTGR to IT.
A 07/19/00 Up dating block : ATT, CD, DBF, EQM, FOX, GAI, GROUP,
MED, PIDMC, PIDS, SELM
A 07/20/00 Details correction for blocks : CD, FI
A 07/21/00 Integration block : PM
B 08/24/00 Integration blocks : SCSTI1, SCSTI2
B 08/31/00 Integration blocks : SCMPA and corrections details for blocks
SCSTI1, SCSTI2, and caracteristic modification on HI/LO limits
for blocks CD, FI, IT, PIDMC, PIDS.
B 09/11/00 Integration block : AOC8K.
B 09/13/00 Modification on HI/LO limits and choice type of slope for blocks
PT, SP.
Modification on block THR.
B 09/28/00 Updating block : GROUP, MAX_WB, MIN_WB, MVS_WB, MO2,
OSC, SL2, SL3.
B 10/04/00 Updating block : SCSTI1, SCSTI2.
B 10/17/00 Updating block : EA2, SEQ.
B 10/27/00 Updating block : SCMPA ; SCSTI1 ; SCSTI2 ; PIDMC.

USER'S MANUAL 3/420
abcd

B 10/31/00 Updating state variables for block : CD ; FI ;.IT ; LELAGMC ;
LPMC ; PIDS ;
B 11/06/00 Integration block : CSAM.
B 11/07/00 Updating block : IT.
B 11/23/00 Updating block :
GAI,SEQ,SP,MO2,MED,SELM,MAX_WB,MIN_WB,MVS_WB
,SL2,SL3,EA2,SOL1,SOL2,LTH_B,PREF.
B 12/18/00 Updating name :
ADL,DBF,DER,FOX,GAI,MAX_WB,MIN_WB,MVS_WB
,OSC,PREF,PT,SELM,SH,SP,THR.
Updating block : EA2,MO2,SOL1,SOL2.
B 12/19/00 Integration block : PID.
B 01/09/01 Integration block : MODBUS_M; COPY_TABLE; 3OF4MC.
Update block DIVMC; MULMC ; Cancel block : TESTP_B;
TESTP_I.
B 01/19/01 Update block MVS_WB_D, MAX_WB_D, MIN_WB_D, PREF_D,
SEQ, SL2, SOL1, SP.
Cancel block : ATT.
B 01/25/01 Update Mandatory Data to make coherent Code and Blocks on
the following blocks : DBF_D, EA2, EQM, GROUP, LTH_B,
MAX_WB_D, MED_D, MIN_WB_D, MO2, MVS_WB_D, OSC_D,
OSL, PID, PREF_D, PT_D, SEQ, SH_D, SL2, SL3, SOL1,
SOL2, SP_D and THR.
B 02/07/01 Update block SOL1(Inputs OPD and CLD Mandatory Connection
and Data).
B 02/13/01 Update block MODBUS_M
B 02/14/01 Update block SELM_D ( Mandatory Data on SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4
and SL5)
B 02/16/01 Update block CSAM (2 outputs Added)
B 02/19/01 Optimization state variable number block IT, PIDMC, PIDS.
Integration block : ALCMC
B 02/21/01 Update block : ALCMC
B 03/01/01 Update block : ALCMC
B 03/06/01 Update block : 3OF4MC
B 03/09/01 Integration block : AVRBM, PT2.
B 04/02/01 Integration block : R_L_FAULT ; PS_SPLIT_RANGE
Update blocks : LPMC; LELAGMC; IT
B 04/04/01 Update blocks : SCI8K; SCO8K ;AOC8K
B 04/10/01 Rename block AVRBM in SCABM ;
B 04/11/01 Update blocks : FOX, PT, THR on Mandatory Data;
B 04/12/01 Integration block : Update IMPMC Specifications.
C 04/13/01 Update blocks : SCI8K;AOC8K; SCSTI1; SCSTI2.
C 05/02/01 Update block : MVS_WB and new block DOIO.
C 05/29/01 Update block : PT2_D

USER'S MANUAL 4/420
abcd

C 05/30/01 Update block : CSAM ; R_L_FAULT, P_S_SPLIT_RANGE
Integration block : SPEED_C
C 05/31/01 Update block : ALCMC
C 06/05/01 Update block : CSAM
C 06/13/01 Integration block : ASLMC
C 06/25/01 Update blocks : ALCMC; ASLMC
C 07/03/01 Update blocks : ASLMC
C 07/05/01 Introducing of EVLOG bloc
C 08/08/01 Update of EVLOG bloc specification for operators and FAULT_1
C 08/08/01 Introducing of IMPMCUP_W bloc
C 08/08/01 Introducing of IMPMCDWN_W bloc
C 09/05/01 Changing to mandatory data for DBF and DER blocs
C 09/18/01 Integration block : ENTHALPY, FTF_1L, and SNP_CONF
C 10/01/01 Integration block : FTF_2L
C 10/03/01 Update block : PIDMC
C 10/29/01 Update block : MO2, SL2
C 11/06/01 Pseudo-code correction on block : THR
C 11/13/01 Update block : PIDMC
C 12/03/01 General update for all blocks before C release : screen copy of
the block display under Controcad and updating number of
internal variables (with state variables).
D 02/08/02 Introducing version 1.4 of EVLOG block
D 03/01/02 Introducing version 1.6 of GROUP block (default values for
INIT_ON/OFF).
D 03/08/02 Updating blocks : SME, PT_D, DOIO and EVLOG.
D 03/13/02 Updating blocks : ITT_D, P_STEP and D release.
E 04/08/02 Updating block : P_STEP.
E 04/18/02 Updating block : CD_D, PIDS, ASLMC, MVS_WB.
E 04/23/02 Updating block EVLOG.
E 04/26/02 Updating block : SPEED_C, P_S_SPLIT_RANGE.
E 05/03/02 New block : LEADLAG_D.
E 05/14/02 Updating blocks : CD_D, MVS_WB_D and PIDS_D on the size of
the images (Translating bitmap image in JPEG image).
E 05/15/02 Updating block : P_STEP.
F 05/29/02 Change MEM output type from Integer to Word on EVLOG block.
F 07/10/02 Updating block : PT_R (on mandatory data).
F 07/12/02 Updating block : PID_D (on documentation errors without
updating specification version).
F 07/16/02 Updating block : SME_D and PID_D.
F 07/22/02 Updating block PID_D.
F 08/26/02 Updating block SCI8K_D.
G 08/29/02 Remove ‘..’ of blocks title for export to HTML (MAX, MIN, MVS)
G 09/04/02 Updating block LEADLAG_D on inputs

USER'S MANUAL 5/420
abcd

G 09/05/02 Updating all diagrams (group all components of the diagram) for
HTML export
G 09/10/02 Updating block SME
G 09/10/02 Updating all diagrams for HTML exportation (group components
of a diagram) and format all titles
G 09/26/02 Updating EVLOG block (LONG type management & shift bug)
G 10/03/02 Updating block SCI8K_D.
H 12/20/02 EVLOG Evolution to manage 9 analogue variables.
H 02/11/03 Update block : ALCMC, MODBUS_M, SCI8K.
H 03/24/03 Update blocks : SL2 and SL3 on state variables.
H 03/24/03 Update block : ITT_D on the maximum limit of I1 and/or I2.
H 03/24/03 Update EVLOG block to handle other types of registers.
I 04/15/03 Updating block : P_STEP.
I 04/25/03 Introducing SAL_D block.
I 07/03/03 Introducing V_VIEW block.
J 11/07/03 Updating block SCI8K_D.
J 12/03/03 Introducing DMOF, DMOS and GRP blocks for TGC-S V2.
J 01/19/04 Introducing COPY_TBL7 ; MODBUS7_M ; Upgrade
COPY_TABLE.
K 04/13/04 Upgrade COPY_TBL7.
K 05/18/04 Updating FOX4_DI for TGS-S V2
K 02/06/04 Updating SME_D
K 10/11/04 Updating ITT_D documentation
K 12/02/04 Updating SCSTI1 and SCSTI2 documentation
L 02/01/05 Introducing SC1STI171_DR and SC2STI171_DR blocks.
L 06/13/05 Introducing SCMPM_D block.
L 06/29/05 Updating SC1STI171_DR only, (SC2STI171_DR deleted), with
new specification.
M 09/29/05 Updating FOX1_DI, FOX2_DI, FOX3_DI for TGS-S V2.
M 09/30/05 Introducing GAIN_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM.
M 09/30/05 Introducing SH_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM.
M 09/30/05 Introducing MED_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM.
M 09/30/05 Introducing SELM_R block for Stress Monitor ALSTOM.
M 10/06/05 Updating PT_D block for RX3i AVR target.
M 10/06/05 Introducing PT_DR block for RX3i AVR target.
M 10/11/05 Introducing SCIWG_D and SCOWG_D blocks for Distributed
analog Input/Output of WAGO.
M 12/26/05 Introducing MODBUS3I_M block for RX3i target.
M 12/26/05 Updating SCMPM_D block for MPM123 module.
M 01/02/06 Introducing SCIX2X_D and SCOX2X_D blocks for ACS Project.
M 02/21/06 Introducing PID_DR block for RX3i TGC target.
M 02/21/06 Updating SAL_D block following the DOEL Project.

USER'S MANUAL 6/420
abcd

M 02/28/06 Updating SC1STI171_DR and SME1_DR blocks following the
BM on adaptative factor above half of nominal speed.
N 03/06/06 Introducing EVLOK_20K block for AVR-V2 needs.
N 04/03/06 Introducing RTU_CONF block for Modbus needs on RX3i.
N 05/15/06 Updating SME_D documentation on defaults 20 and 50.
N 05/17/06 Introducing MOVE2W_R and MOVER_2W blocks for Modbus
needs.
N 05/17/06 Introducing COPY_TBLRX3I block for Modbus needs.
O 08/17/06 Introducing MED2_D and MED2_R blocks for diagram needs.
O 09/26/06 Introducing CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS block for HMI needs.
P 02/08/07 Updating SCMPM_D block : Negative logic for outputs TRIP,
TCh1/2/3/4.
Q 07/09/07 Updating SC1STI171_DR to avoid unsteadiness on division
factor change ;
Updating SCMPM_D on the new name of TRIP connexion : N-
TRIP according to the new function of the block ;
Updating SME1_D and SME1_DR documentations on the
FREQMF variable ;
New MVM MPM_TGC_CH1 for MPM123 parameter reading
without the use of VISUREC software : Read GestEve 13 406 to
use OPC Modbus ).
R 09/29/07 Introducing RED_MOVE_B, RED_MOVE_I and RED_MOVE_R
blocks for Redundant Setpoints and Modbus variables needs ;
Introducing MOVE_SP block for MFC3000 needs ;
S 08/22/08 Introducing MODBUS3I_PORT1_M and MODBUS3I_PORT2_M
blocks for TGC-S needs ;
Updating MVM of TPC for AVR needs ;
Updating SME1_DR for TGC-S needs ;
Updating MODBUS3I_PORT1_M and MODBUS3I_PORT2_M
after the mail of P.Chauvin of October 21 th, 2008 for TGC-S
needs ;
Introducing TIME_METER_M block for TGC-S needs ;

USER'S MANUAL 7/420
abcd
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REVISION HISTORY.........................................................................................................................3
Section 1 PRESENTATION OF THE DOCUMENT .................................................................11
Section 2 1OF2MC_(I,D) : 2 INPUTS VOTATION ...................................................................18
Section 5 ADL_B : BLOCK DELAY ........................................................................................26
Section 6 ADL_(D,R) : BLOCK DELAY ..................................................................................29
Section 7 ALCMC : ACTUATOR LOGIC COMMAND.............................................................32
Section 8 AOC8K_(I,D) : ANALOG OUTPUT COMMAND .....................................................36
Section 9 ASLMC : ACCELERATION SPEED LIMITOR ........................................................40
Section 10 CD_(I,D) : AUTO / MANU FUNCTION.....................................................................45
Section 11 COPY_TABLE : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES ........................................49
Section 12 COPY_TBL7 : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES ...........................................53
Section 13 COPY_TBLRX3I : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES .....................................56
Section 14 CSAM_(I,D) : CONTROL STATION AUTOMATIC / MANUAL ...............................58
Section 15 CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS : CLEAR THE FAULTS OF CONTROLLER .....................61
Section 16 DBF_D : DEAD BAND FUNCTION .........................................................................63
Section 17 DER_D : DIFFERENTIATOR...................................................................................66
Section 18 DIVMC_(I,D) : DIVISION ..........................................................................................69
Section 19 DMOF : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT THAT MAY DEPENDS ON
FEEDBACK..............................................................................................................71
Section 20 DMOS : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT STORED ..............................................79
Section 21 DOIO : DO_IO FUNCTION OF CTOOLKIT .............................................................86
Section 22 EA2 / EA2W : ELECTRIC ACTUATOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND.....89
Section 23 ENTHALPY_D : ENTHALPY CALCULATION ........................................................97
Section 24 EQM : MULTIPLE EQUALITY ...............................................................................103
Section 25 EVLOG_20K : EVENT LOG ..................................................................................105
Section 26 FI_(D,R) : FOLLOW-UP INTEGRATOR FUNCTION ............................................114
Section 27 FOX*_(D,DI,R) : FUNCTION GENERATOR..........................................................117
Section 28 FTF_1L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - FIRST LEVEL ............................................120
Section 29 FTF_2L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - SECOND LEVEL .......................................122
Section 30 GAI(_D,N_R) : ADJUSTABLE GAIN.....................................................................128
Section 31 GROUP : FUNCTION GROUP ..............................................................................131
Section 32 GRP : FUNCTION GROUP ( WITH OR WITHOUT TIME MONITORING ) ...........135
Section 33 IMPMC / IMPMCW : PULSE ON EDGE ................................................................140
Copyright © ALSTOM 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express
authority is strictly forbidden

USER'S MANUAL 8/420
abcd
Section 34 IMPMCDWN : PULSE ON FALLING EDGE..........................................................143

Section 35 IMPMCUP : PULSE ON RISING EDGE ................................................................147
Section 36 IT_(D,R) : INTEGRATOR.......................................................................................151
Section 37 ITT_D : IT_D INTEGRATOR WITH TIME IN SECONDS.......................................154
Section 38 LEADLAG_D : LEAD LAG FILTER ......................................................................157
Section 39 LELAGMC_(I,D) : LEAD LAG FILTER..................................................................159
Section 40 LPMC_(I,D) : LOW PASS FILTER ........................................................................162
Section 41 LTH_B : BOOLEAN LOGICAL THRESHOLD ......................................................165
Section 42 MAX_WB_D : MAXIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL....................169
Section 43 MED(2)_(D,R) : MEDIAN THRESHOLD................................................................173
Section 44 MIN_WB_D : MINIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL ......................176
Section 45 MODBUS_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE MANAGEMENT ......................179
Section 46 MODBUS3I_M : MODBUS MASTER FOR RX3i...................................................183
Section 47 MODBUS7_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE C8075 MANAGEMENT.........189
Section 48 MOVE2W_R : CONVERSION................................................................................194
Section 49 MOVER_2W : CONVERSION................................................................................196
Section 50 MOVE_SP : WRITE VARIABLE IN OTHER..........................................................198
Section 51 MO2 / MO2W : MOTOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND...........................200
Section 52 MULMC_(I,D) : MULTIPLICATION........................................................................209
Section 53 MVS_WB_D : MEAN VALUE OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL..............211
Section 54 OSC_D : OSCILLATOR.........................................................................................215
Section 55 OSL : ONE-SHOT LIMITED...................................................................................218
Section 56 P_STEP : STEP OF SEQUENCE CONTROL .......................................................221
Section 57 PID : PROPORTIONAL INTEGRATED DERIVATED ...........................................228
Section 58 PIDMC_(I,D) : PID MACHINE CONTROL .............................................................235
Section 59 PIDS_(I,D) : PID CORRECTOR WITH STATISM..................................................241
Section 60 PM_(I,D) : PULSE MODULATION.........................................................................246
Section 61 PREF_D : PREFERRED VALUE SELECTION .....................................................250
Section 62 PS_SPLIT_RANGE : PARALLEL SERIAL SPLIT RANGE..................................253
Section 63 PT _(D, DR, R) : FIRST ORDER TIME DELAY.....................................................257
Section 64 PT2_D : SECOND ORDER TRANSFERT FUNCTION .........................................263
Section 65 R_L_FAULT : READ_LAST_FAULT ....................................................................265
Section 66 RED_MOVE_B : REDUNDANT MOVE FOR BOOLEAN, INTEGER AND REAL 268
Section 67 RTU_CONF : RTU CONF ......................................................................................270
Section 68 SAL_D : SPEED ACCELERATION LIMITOR .......................................................273
Section 69 SC1STI171_DR : SCAN STI171 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT .......................279

USER'S MANUAL 9/420
abcd
Section 70 SCABM _D : UMT CARD INPUTS SCANNING ....................................................285

Section 71 SCI8k_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT ...............................................292
Section 72 SCIWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG INPUT OF WAGO...........295
Section 73 SCIX2X_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT.................................................298
Section 74 SCMPA_(I,D) : SCAN MPA157 MODULE.............................................................301
Section 75 SCMPM_D : MEASUREMENT PROTECTION MODULE .....................................305
Section 76 SCO8K_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT.........................................311
Section 77 SCOWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG OUTPUT OF WAGO .....313
Section 78 SCOX20_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT ...........................................315
Section 79 SCSTI1_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT ...........................317
Section 80 SCSTI2_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR DOUBLE SHAFT..........................323
Section 81 SELM_(D,R) : BINARY MULTIPLE SELECTION .................................................329
Section 82 SEQ : SEQUENCE FUNCTION .............................................................................332
Section 83 SH_(D,R) : SAMPLE AND HOLD..........................................................................337
Section 84 SL2 : SELECTOR 2 UNITS ...................................................................................339
Section 85 SL3 : SELECTOR 3 UNITS ...................................................................................347
Section 86 SME*_ (D, DR) : SPEED MEASURE ELABORATION .........................................360
Section 87 SNP_CONF : SNP CONF ......................................................................................366
Section 88 SOL1 / SOL1W : SINGLE COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 1 LOGIC ORDER
COMMAND ............................................................................................................369
Section 89 SOL2 / SOL2W : DUAL COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS
COMMAND ............................................................................................................376
Section 90 SP_D : SET POINT CALCULATION .....................................................................383
Section 91 SPEED_C : SPEED CONSIGNATOR ...................................................................390
Section 92 TIME_METER_L : TIME METER IN SECONDS ...................................................411
Section 93 THR_(D,R) : THRESHOLD WITH HYSTERESIS ..................................................414
Section 94 V_VIEW : VARIABLE VIEWER .............................................................................418

USER'S MANUAL 10/420
abcd
Section 1 PRESENTATION OF THE DOCUMENT
This document describes the use of the function blocks belonging to the P320 Machine Control
library. Each function block is described in a technical sheet enclosed in the following document.
The technical sheets are presented in alphabetical order.
1.1 Presentation of the technical sheets.
The technical sheet includes the following items :
- The name of the function block (on the left top of the sheet),
- The graphical representation of the function block,
- The table of arguments characteristics,
- The FB function description ;
- The function block use description that includes :
• an optional and specific argument description,
• the parameters to be initialized,
• some notes on particular use,
• The fast description of the state variables used inside the block ;
- The function block specification that includes :
• the description of the internal and state variables used in the FB,
• the basic function used by the FB.

abcd
1.2 Function Block graphical representation
A function block representation is given hereafter ;
1
COS
IN E S OUT
2 4 3
1- Name of the function block,
2- Code name(10 characters ) ; name of the argument which is used in the FB code,
3- Display name (10 characters): name of the argument displayed in CONTROCAD,
4- ARROW :
- Full arrow : represent an input/output that must be wired to another FB, or

connected to a variable or an immediate value, (mandatory connection = ‘Y’);
- Empty arrow : represent an optional input/output.
1.3 Table of arguments characteristics.
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Value Mand. Advised First
Connection Data parameters scan
value value
Inputs
INPUT1 (IN1) Input B Y - Y - N - -

IN2 Input B Y - Y - N - -
IN3 Input B Y - N 1 N - -
IN4 Input B Y - Y - N - -
Outputs Y - Y - Y - -
RE Operator result Boolean

Parameters

abcd
There are two names for an argument. The key name which is used into the code and the display
which is displayed. Often, the names are the same, but sometimes they could be different. In this
case, the display name is between round brackets.

abcd
The different columns contain :
NAME : name of the argument
- input
- output
- parameters : it is an input often connected to a tuning variable which can have 2

levels ;
- Configurator : the parameters can’t be changed online

(e.g.: mechanical characteristics as nominal speed, …).
- User : the parameters can be changed online.
DESCRIPTION : description of the argument,
TYPE : a variable can have one of the following types :
- (B)OOLEAN [1 bit, 0 or 1] ANY_NUM

- (W)ORD [16 bits integer, from 0 to 65535]
- (I)NTEGER [16 bits integer, from –32768 to 32767]
ANY_INT
- (L)ONG [32 bits integer, from 0 to 4294967295]
- (D)OUBLE [32 bits integer, from –2147483648 to 2147483647]
- (R)EAL[32 bits, 3.4e +/-38]
- (D)URATION [32 bits]
- (C)URSOR[16 bit pointer]
ANY_INT : WORD, INTEGER, LONG, DOUBLE, CURSOR

ANY_NUM : WORD, INTEGER, LONG, DOUBLE, REAL
ANY_NUM* mean that all the arguments in the FB must be in the
same type.
For arguments representing an array of value, the length must be
indicated. e.g. : an array of 8 boolean -> BOOLEAN[8].
RANGE : For each argument, the limit of the numerical value must be
indicated according to its type sometimes it is important to give its physical
value.
NEG : It is the possibility of negation for a boolean input (/) and of opposition for a
numerical input (-). The choice between the negation and the opposition is in
harmony with the connection type, which can be logical or numerical.

abcd
MANDATORY CONNECTION : When it is set to “Y”, the argument must be wired to another
FB, or connected to a variable or an immediate value.

abcd
DEFAULT VALUE : It is the default value of the signal on an argument if there is no signal
associated with this argument. Another possibility to define a default
signal is to declare a DEFAULT VARIABLE by using the pre-
processing directives of the LEA language.
MANDATORY DATA : Obligation to affect a value or a variable to the argument.
ADVISED PARAMETER VALUE : Value used in normal condition during the execution of the FB.
This value is an attribute of the connected variable.
FIRST SCAN VALUE : Value of the argument during the first execution cycle. It allows the
function block to be internally initialised.
1.4 General type of argument
HY : hysteresis
HI : high limit
LO : low limit
HT : high threshold
LT : low threshold
DL : line validation
DF : defaut validation
TY : type of process
SL : slope
PT : period of time
IN : input
IC : init command
IV : init value
IS : init status
RUN : run command
BCL : busy for closed loop
Bol : busy for open loop
BSY : busy
ME : measurement
SP : set point
FRZ : freeze
OLC : open loop compaign
TRK : tracking
ENO : error output
Gn : gain
AT : attenuation
TH : threshold
BD : Dead Band

abcd
1.5 Redundancy
All the blocks have an implicit redundancy : for the 1oo2 applications, the users don’t be busy to
make the redundancy of the functions (a set of blocks). This is automatic by the design of each
block with the implicit redundancy, allows by the redundancy exchange of the state variables.
1.6 Controcad library display

abcd
Section 2 1OF2MC_(I,D) : 2 INPUTS VOTATION
1OF2MC _I Specification version : 1.1 (07/10/00)

1OF2MC _D Specification version : 1.1 (07/10/00)
2.1 Component representation
2.2 FunctioN
ENO=0 AND OV1=0 AND OV2=0

IF IV1=1 AND IV2=1
IF TY=1 : RE = MAX(IN1;IN2)
ELSE IF TY=2 : RE = MIN(IN1;IN2)
ELSE RE = (IN1+IN2)/2
IF |IN1-IN2|>EPSMAX THEN RE= BCK AND ENO=1 AND OV1= 1
IF IV1=1 AND IV2=0 : RE=IN1 AND OV1=1
IF IV1=0 AND IV2=1 : RE=IN2 AND OV1=1
IF IV1=0 AND IV2=0 : RE= BCK AND ENO=1 AND OV1=1 AND OV2=1
2.3 Arguments characteristics
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Mand Advised First
Connection value . Data parameters scan
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input # 1 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IV1 Valid indicator BOOL Y 0= INVALID N 1 Y
on Input #1 .
IN2 Input # 2 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IV2 Valid indicator BOOL Y 0= INVALID N 1 Y
on Input #2 .
BCK Backup I/D Y -32768 to+32767 N 0 Y
Outputs
RE Output I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y Y 0

abcd
value value
ENO RE= BCK BOOL Y 1 = IN1 AND IN2 Invalid OR N Y 0
. |IN1-IN2|>MAX
RE= BCK
OV1 Indicator #1 on BOOL Y 1 = IN1 OR IN2 Invalid N Y 0
output .
OV2 Indicator #2 on BOOL Y 1 = IN1 AND IN2 Invalid N Y 0
output .
Parameters
TY treatment I/D N TY=0: RE=(IN1+IN2))/2 N 0 Y
TY=1: RE=MAX(IN1;IN2)
TY=2: RE=MIN(IN1;IN2)
TY>2 => TY=0 (internal)
EPSMAX Eps Max I/D N 0 to+32000 N 32000 Y
betwen inputs
2.4 Use
2.5 SPECIFICATIONS
2.5.1 Internal Variables and State Variables
NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT.VAL (R)
Internal variables : 5 booleans and 4 doubles.
2.5.2 Function Block Code
2.5.3 Basic Function used
1OF2MC_D().

abcd

3.2 Function
ENO=0 ; OV1=0 ; OV2=0 ; EC12 = 0 ; EC23 = 0 ; EC31 = 0 ; DF1 = 0 ; DF2 = 0 ; DF3 = 0

Case 1 : All IVx OK;
IF( IV1=IV2=Iv3=1): TY = 0 : RE = (IN1+IN2+IN3)/3
TY =1 OR TY=2 : RE = Medium value (IN1;IN2;IN3)
Input difference calculation :

if | IN1 - IN2 | > EPSMax EC12 = 1
Input fault Discrimination with DF1, DF2, DF3 output
if EC12 & EC23 DF2 = 1

if EC12 & EC31 DF1 = 1
if EC23 & EC31 DF3 = 1
IF ( all input are valid AND DFz)):

OV1=1
TY =0 : RE = (INx+INy)/2
TY =1 : RE = MAX(INx;INy)
TY =2 : RE = MIN(INx;INy)
IF all input are valid AND [ (DF1 and DF2) or (DF1 and DF3) or (DF2 and DF3) ]

abcd
RE= BCK AND OV1=1;ENO = 1
Case 2 : 2 of 3 IVx OK
IF two of the inputs are valid (ie IVx=IVy=1; Ivz=0; x&y valid; z invalid)
OV1=1
if | INx - INy | <= EPSMax
TY =0 : RE = (INx+INy)/2
TY =1 : RE = MAX(INx;INy)
TY =2 : RE = MIN(INx;INy)
else (only two values are valid AND | INx - INy | > EPSMax)
RE= BCK AND ENO = 1

Cas3 : only 1 or 0 IVx OK
IF all input are invalid OR only one value is valid
RE= BCK AND OV1=1;OV2=1;ENO = 1
Conne value . Data parameters scan
ction value value
Inputs
IN1 Input # 1 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IV1 Valid Input 1 BOOL Y 1 = Input #1 valid N 1 Y
IN2 Input # 2 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IN3 Input # 3 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
Outputs
ENO Result Indicator BOOL Y 1 => RE = BCK N - Y 0
.
DF1 Indicator on input BOOL Y 1 => Input #1 discarded N - Y 0
#1
#2 .
#3 .
OV1 Indicator one or BOOL Y 1 => one or more input invalid (IVx) N - Y 0
more input invalid .
OV2 Indicator two or BOOL Y 1 => two or more inputs N - Y 0
more input invalid . invalid or discarted (IVx,DFy)
Parameters
TY treatment I/D N TY=0: RE average or (INx+INy))/2 N 0 Y
TY=1: RE medium or MAX(INx;INy)
TY=2: RE medium or MIN(INx;INy)
TY>2 => TY=0 (internal)
EPSMAX Eps Max betwen I/D N 0 to+32000 N 32000 Y
inputs

abcd
3.4 Use
3.5 SPECIFICATIONS
2OF3MC_D().

abcd

4.2 Function
ENO=0 ; OV1=0 ; OV2=0 ; EC12 = 0 ; EC23 = 0 ; EC31 = 0 ; EC42 = 0 ; EC43 = 0 ; EC41 = 0 ; DF1
= 0 ; DF2 = 0 ; DF3 = 0 ; DF4 = 0
Case 1 : All IVx OK;

if | IN4 - IN1 | > EPSMax EC41 = 1.
Input fault Discrimination with DF1, DF2, DF3, DF4 output

if (EC12 & EC23) || (EC12 & EC42) || (EC42 & EC23) DF2 = 1
IF( All Ivx AND No DFz): RE = (IN1+IN2+IN3+IN4)/4

ELSE
IF (All Ivx AND DFz):

abcd
OV1=1
RE = (Inw + Inx + INy)/3
IF all input are valid AND [ (DF1 and DF2) or (DF1 and DF3) or (DF1 and DF4) or (DF2 and DF3) or
(DF2 and DF4) or (DF3 and DF4)]
RE= BCK AND OV1=1; OV2=1; ENO = 1
Case 2 : 3 of 4 IVx OK
IF three of the inputs are valid (ie IVw= IVx=IVy=1; Ivz=0; w&x&y valid; z invalid)
OV1=1
if | INw - INx | > EPSMax ECwx = 1
if | INx - INy | > EPSMax ECxy = 1
if | INy - INw | > EPSMax ECyw = 1.
Input fault Discrimination with DF1, DF2, DF3, DF4 output
IF ( DFw or DFx or DFy ):

RE= BCK AND ENO = 1 ; OV2=1
ELSE
RE = (Inw + Inx + INy)/3
Cas3 : less of 2 IVx OK
IF all input are invalid OR only one value is valid
RE= BCK AND OV1=1;OV2=1;ENO = 1
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Mand. Advised First
Connectio value Data parameters scan
n value value
Inputs
IN1 Input # 1 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IN2 Input # 2 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IN3 Input # 3 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
IN4 Input # 4 I/D Y -32768 to+32767 Y - Y
Outputs
ENO Result Indicator BOOL Y 1 => RE = BCK N - Y 0
OV1 Indicator one or BOOL Y 1 => one or more input N - Y 0
more input invalid invalid (IVx)

abcd
n value value
OV2 Indicator two or more BOOL Y 1 => two or more inputs N - Y 0
input invalid invalid or discarted
(IVx,DFy)
DF1 Indicator on input #1 BOOL Y 1 => Input #1 discarded N - Y 0
Parameters
EPSMAX Eps Max betwen I/D N 0 to+32000 N 32000 Y
inputs
4.4 Use
4.5 SPECIFICATIONS
3OF4MC_D().

abcd
Section 5 ADL_B : BLOCK DELAY
Specification version : 1.0 (05/15/00)
5.2 Function
This block realises a delay from the input in accordance to the model activation period.
INITIALIZATION : the block output RE is set to IV (Initialization Value).
NORMAL OPERATION : the block output is established as follows :
RE (t) = IN (t-1).
Example : Model Sample time Ts
1
output : RE 0
1
input : IN 0
1
init value : IV 0
t0 t1 t’-1 t’ t’’-1 t’’

abcd
Name Description Type Neg Range Mandatory Default Mandatory Advised First
Connection Value Data parameters scan
value value
Inputs
IN Input to Boolean N - Y N - -
delayed
Outputs
RE Output or Boolean N - Y Y - IV
Result
Parameters
IV Initialisation Boolean N - N 0 N - -
value
The block ADL_B is boolean.

IN, RE & IV are the same type (boolean).
5.4 Use
5.4.1 Parameters to initialize
- During initialisation, at PLC start-up : RE = IV. This is a User parameter.
5.4.2 Arguments Description
IN : INPUT : input, mandatory.

RE : RESULT or OUTPUT : output, mandatory and memory.
IV : INIT VALUE : input.
5.4.3 Recommandations
This block is an historical block.
Associated FGT : NONE

Scheme

abcd
IN Z-1 RE
5.5 Specification :
The ouput is a state variable. A redundant internal variable exist (1 boolean).
LEA.
None,FB ADL_B.

abcd
Section 6 ADL_(D,R) : BLOCK DELAY
ADL_D Specification version : 1.1 (12/18/00)

ADL_R Specification version : 1.1 (12/18/00)
6.2 Function
This block realises a delay from the input in accordance to the model activation period.
INITIALIZATION : the block output is set to IV.
NORMAL OPERATION : the block output is established as follows :
RE (t) = IN (t-1).
Example : Model Sample time Ts
9
output : RE 0
9
input : IN 0
9
init value : IV 0
t0 t1 t’-1 t’ t’’-1 t’’

abcd
value value
Inputs
IN Input to
delayed
ANY_NUM N ]− ∞;+∞[ Y N - -
Outputs
RE Output or
Result
ANY_NUM N ]− ∞;+∞[ Y Y - IV
Parameters
IV Initialisation
value
ANY_NUM N ]− ∞;+∞[ N 0 N - -
The block ADL can be real, integer or double integer.

IN, RE & IV are the same type for each type of block.
6.4 Use
- During initialisation, at PLC start-up : RE = IV. This is a User parameter.
IN : INPUT : input, mandatory.

RE : RESULT or OUTPUT : output, mandatory and memory.
IV : INIT VALUE : input.
This block is an historical block.

Scheme

abcd
IN Z-1 RE
6.5 Specification :
The ouput is a state variable. A redundant internal variable exist (1 double for ADL_D
and 1 real for ADL_R).
LEA.
None, FB ADL_D and ADL_R.

abcd
Section 7 ALCMC : ACTUATOR LOGIC COMMAND
ALCMC Specification version : 1.5 (02/11/03)
7.2 Function
Motor logiq command function

Inputs
MON : Manual order to set ON
ONIC : ON initials conditions
ONPC : ON permanents conditions
MOFF : Manual order to set OFF
OFFIC : OFF initials conditions
OFFPC : OFF permanent conditions
AON : Auto order to set ON
AOFF : Auto order to set OFF
ACK : Acknowledge
AF : Actuator in fault
RUN : Actuator running
Parameters
PULS : Pulsed outputs (if =1)
TEMP : Time delay for execution time too long
Outputs
ON : ON order
OFF : OFF order
DISC : Indication discrepancy

abcd
PROBLEM : Indication actuator in fault (set by AF; reset by ACK)

IRUN : Actuator state (0=>not running ; 1=>running)
IRUN(K) = RUN(K)
DE=0 ;DH=0
IF (AF (K) = 1)
THEN PROBLEM (K) = 1
ELSE IF (ACK = 1)
THEN PROBLEM (K) = 0
ENDIF
IF (PROBLEM (K) = 1)
THEN
ON(K) = 0; OFF(K) =0; CPT(K) = 0
ELSE
IF (MON(K) = 1 AND ONIC(K) = 1) OR AON(K) = 1
THEN DE(K) = 1; DISC(K) = 0
ENDIF
IF (MOFF(K) = 1 AND OFFIC(K) = 1) OR AOFF(K) = 1
THEN
DH(K) = 1 ; DISC(K) = 0
IF (DE(K) = 1)
DH(K) = 0
DE(K) = 0
ENDIF
ENDIF
(*** Time delay for discrepancy ***)
IF DISC(K-1) = 1
THEN
ON(K) = OFF(K) =0 ; CPT(K) =0
IF (ON(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 1) OR (OFF(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 0)
THEN DISC(K) = 0
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((ON(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 0) OR (OFF(K-1) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 1)) AND DISC(K-1) = 0
THEN CPT(K) = CPT(K-1) + CYC
IF CPT(K) > TEMP
THEN DISC(K) = 1
ENDIF
ENDIF
(*** Loss of permanents conditions ***)
IF OFFPC(K) = 0
THEN OFF(K) = 0; DH(K) =0; DE(K) =1
ENDIF
IF ONPC(K) = 0
THEN ON(K) = 0; DE(K) =0; DH(K) =1

abcd
ENDIF
(*** Outputs treatment ***)
IF DE(K) = 1 AND ON(K-1) = 0
THEN ON(K) = 1 ; DE(K) = 0
IF OFF(K-1) = 1
THEN OFF(K) = 0; CPT(K) = 0
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF DH(K) = 1 AND OFF(K-1) = 0
THEN OFF(K) = 1 ; DH(K) = 0
IF ON(K-1) = 1
THEN ON(K) = 0 ; CPT(K) = 0
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF PULS = 1
THEN IF ON(K) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 1
THEN ON(K) = 0; CPT(K) = 0
ENDIF
IF OFF(K) = 1 AND RUN(K) = 0
THEN OFF(K) = 0; CPT(K) = 0
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
If AF is set, outputs are reset and PROBLEM is set; After ACK, output PROBLEM is reset but old
order output is not set until new command.
value value
Inputs
MON Manual order to set ON BOOL Y N 0 Y
ONIC ON initials conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y
ONPC ON permanents conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y
MOFF Manual order to set OFF BOOL Y N 0 Y
OFFIC OFF initials conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y
OFFPC OFF permanents conditions BOOL Y N 1 Y
AON Auto order to set ON BOOL Y N 0 Y
AOFF Auto order to set OFF BOOL Y N 0 Y
ACK Acknowledge BOOL Y N 1 Y
AF Actuator in fault BOOL Y N 0 Y
RUN Actuator running BOOL Y N 0 Y
Outputs
ON ON order BOOL Y Y Y 0
OFF OFF order BOOL Y Y Y 0
DISC Indication discrepancy BOOL Y N Y 0
PROBLEM Indication actuator in fault; BOOL Y N Y 0
treatment disabled.
IRUN Actuator state BOOL Y N Y 0
(0=> not running 1=> running)
Parameters
PULS Pulsed outputs BOOL Y N 0 Y

abcd
value value
TEMP Time delay for discrepancy D Y 0 to 32000 N 20 Y
(0 to 32,000 s) (20 ms)
7.4 Use
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS

CPT Tempo for discrepancy D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
ON ON memorization B 0 R
OFF OFF memorization B 0 R
DISC DISC memorization B 0 R
PROBLEM PROBLEM memorization B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
Internal variables : 19 booleans(amongst which 4 state variables) and 2 doubles.
ALCMC()

abcd
Section 8 AOC8K_(I,D) : ANALOG OUTPUT COMMAND
AOC8K_I Specification version : 1.2 (04/13/01)

AOC8K_D Specification version : 1.2 (04/13/01)
8.2 Function
Control station with manual increase and decrease command inputs.
Inputs :
IN : Analogue input to be copied into automatic mode output,
MAS : Manual Auto mode selection logic Switch,
MOVR : Manual mode Overrides,
IND : Request logic input + manual,
DED : Request logic input - manual,
IV : Analogue input of output initialisation,
IC : initialisation Command of output,
RST : Operator output reset logic input,
GI : Galvanometer Input Value,
GC : Galvanometer Command,
Parameterization :
SSL : Slow SLope value in manual mode before Temp,
FSL : Fast SLope value in manual mode after Temp,
TEMP : Temporisation before Fast Slope,
HI : High limit value.
LO : Low limit value.

abcd
Outputs :
RE : Result AOC operator.
ST : State Manual indication, 1=> Manual mode.
SIG : Signalization : 0=> Auto; 1=> Manu; Alternate state => Manu override,
HL : Logic output; High Limit,
LL : Logic output; Low Limit,
GO : Galvanometer output (with GI if GC = 1 and with RE if GC = 0),
IF INIT THEN Re (K) = 0 ; HL=0 ; LL=0; REP(K)= 0 ;ST(K) = SIG =1

ELSE
SIG = ST(K-1) ; HL=0; LL=0
IF HI<=LO THEN Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1; REP(K)= HI * 1000
ELSE
IF (RST) THEN REP(K-1) = 0; SIG =ST(K) =1
ELSE
IF (IC) THEN REP(K-1) = IV*1000; SIG =ST(K) =1
ELSE
IF (MOVR) THEN ST(K) =1; SIG = Alternate state (with T=1s)
ELSE IF (MAS(K) &! MAS(K-1)) THEN ST(K) = ! ST(K-1); SIG = ST(K)
IF (!ST(K) ) THEN REP(K-1) = IN*1000; CPTI(K) =0; CPTD(K) =0
ELSE IF (IND !=DED)
IF (IND ) THEN CPTD(K) = 0
IF (CPTI(K) < (TEMP*1000)) OR (TEMP = 0)
THEN CPTI(K) = CPTI(K-1) + CYC
REP(K) = REP(K-1) + SSL(CYC)
ELSE
REP(K) = REP(K-1) + FSL(CYC)
ELSE IF (DED) THEN CPTI(K) = 0
IF (CPTD(K) < (TEMP*1000)) OR (TEMP = 0)
THEN CPTD(K) = CPTD(K-1) + CYC
REP(K) = REP(K-1) - SSL(CYC)
ELSE
REP(K) = REP(K-1) - FSL(CYC)
ELSE CPTI(K) =0; CPTD(K) =0
ENDIF
ENDIF
RE(K) = REP(K)/1000
IF RE (K) >= HI THEN RE (K) = HI ; HL=1; REP(K)= HI * 1000
IF RE (K) <= LO THEN RE (K) = LO ; LL=1; REP(K)= LO * 1000
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (GC) THEN GO = GI
ELSE GO = RE

abcd
Name Description Type N Range Mand. Def. Mand Advised First

eg Connectio value . Data parameters scan
n value value
Inputs
IN Analogue input to be copied I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
into automatic mode output (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
MAS Manual Auto mode selection BOOL. Y N 0 Y
logic Switch (0->1 Swich
mode)
MOVR Manual mode Overrides (1 BOOL Y N 0 Y
Override manual mode)
IND Request logic input + BOOL Y N 0 Y
manual
DED Request logic input – BOOL Y N 0 Y
manual
IV Analogue input of output I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
initialisation (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IC Initialisation Command of BOOL Y N 0 Y
output (=1)
RST Operator output reset logic BOOL Y N 0 Y
input (=1)
GI Galvanometer Input Value I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
GC Galvanometer Command BOOL Y N 0 Y
(=1 : GO=GI)
Outputs
RE Result AOC operator. I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 Y Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ST State Manual indication, BOOL. Y - N Y 1
1=> Manual mode
SIG Signalization : 0=> Auto; BOOL. Y - N Y 1
1=> Manu; Alternate state
=> Manu override
HL Logic output; High Limit (=1) BOOL. Y - N Y 0
LL Logic output; Low Limit (=1) BOOL. Y N - Y 0
GO Galvanometer output (with I/D N -20000 to 20000 N Y 0
GI if GC = 1 and with RE if (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
GC = 0)
Parameters
SSL Slow SLope value in I/D N 0 to+32 000 Y Y
manual mode before Temp (0 to 320 00%/s)
FSL Fast SLope value in manual I/D N 0 to+32 000 N 0 Y
mode after Temp (0 to 320 00%/s)
TEMP Temporisation before Fast I/D N 0 to 32000 N 0 Y
Slope (if TEMP =0 : only (0 to 32 000s)
SSL)
HI High limit value. I/D Y -20000 to 20000 N 20000 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
LO Low limit value. I/D Y -20000 to 20000 N -20000 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
8.4 Use
8.5 SPECIFICATIONS

abcd

REP RE (K-1) *1000 D 0 R
CPTI Tempo for Fast Increase D 0 R
CPTD Tempo for Fast Decrease D 0 R
ALT Alternate state temporisation (K-1) D 0 R
ST Manual mode memorisation (K-1) B 1 R
MAS MAS memorisation (K-1) B 0 R
Internal variables : 12 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 12 doubles (amongst which 4
state variables).
AOC8K_D().

abcd
Section 9 ASLMC : ACCELERATION SPEED LIMITOR
ASLMC Specification version : 1.3 (04/18/01)
9.2 Function
This FB do the turbine acceleration speed limitation by logical or progressive output.

ASLMC
OFF
TST
IN G2
SFF
RE
AFF
G1
PASL
TA1 TA2
NACC
STI
ALT; ALHY
T1 T2
T>= LASL
SLT; SLHY
Inputs:
IN : input (Turbine Speed).
Parameterization :
SFF,: Speed Filter cut off Frequency.
OFF : Offset added to filtered speed.
STI : Speed turbine Threshold Inhibition.
TST : Turbine Specific Time.
AFF: Acceleration Filter cut off Frequency.

abcd
TA1 : First Threshold Acceleration for progressive action by G1.

G1 : First Gradient for progressive action,
TA2 : Second Threshold Acceleration for progressive action by G2.
G2 : Second Gradient for progressive action,
SLT: Speed turbine Logical action Threshold.
SLHY: Speed turbine Logical action Hysteresis.
ALT: Acceleration turbine Logical action Threshold.
ALHY: Acceleration turbine Logical action Hysteresis.
T1 : Time Threshold for prolongation by T2.
T2 : prolongation Time if action duration is bigger than T1.
Outputs:
RE : output (progressive limitation)
NACC: Normalised ACCeleration
PASL: Progressive Acceleration Speed Limitation Indicator
LASL: Logical Acceleration Speed Limitation output
Double long Qa, Qs, R1, R2, R3, R4

IF (INIT ) THEN
If SFF (K) != 0
Then Qs (K) =exp (-(CYC/1000)* SFF(K)*2*PI)
Else Qs(K) =0
If AFF (K) != 0
Then Qa (K) =exp (-(CYC/1000)* AFF(K)*2*PI)
Else Qa(K) =0
PASL = LASL = ALTP = SLTP =0;
RE = NACC =0;
R1(K)=IN
IF (R1 (K) +OFF)> IN)
THEN R2(K) = R1 (K) +OFF
ELSE R2(K) = IN
IF (STI > R2 (K))
THEN R2(K) = STI
CPT1=CPT2=R4(K)=0
SFFP=SFF
AFFP=AFF
ELSE
If SFF (K) != 0 Then
If SFF (K) != SFF (K-1) Then Qs (K) =exp (- (CYC/1000)* SFF(K)*2*PI)
Else Qs(K) = Qs (K-1).
Else Qs(K) =0
If AFF (K) != 0 Then
If AFF (K) != AFF (K-1) Then Qa (K) =exp (-(CYC/1000)* AFF(K)*2*PI)
Else Qa(K) = Qa (K-1).
Else Qa(K) =0
R1 (K) = IN (K) + Qs*( R1 (K-1)- IN (K))

IF (R1 (K)+OFF)> IN)
THEN R2(K) = R1 (K) +OFF

abcd
ELSE R2(K) = IN
IF (STI > R2 (K))
THEN R2(K) = STI
R3(K)= (R2(K)- R2(K-1))*(1000/CYC)
R4 (K) = R3(K) + Qa*( R4(K-1)- R3(K))
NACC (K)=R4(K)* TST
IF (NACC(K)<= TA1)
THEN RE= 0
PASL = 0
ELSE
PASL = 1
IF (NACC(K)<= TA2)
THEN RE= (NACC- TA1)* G1
ELSE
RE= (TA2- TA1)* G1+(NACC- TA2)* G2*
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (ALTP!=0)
IF (NACC(K)< (ALT-ALHY)); ALTP=0
ELSE (ALTP=1)
ELSE
IF (NACC(K)> ALT); ALTP=1
ELSE (ALTP=0)
ENDIF
IF (SLTP!=0)
IF (IN (K)< (SLT-SLHY)); SLTP=0
ELSE (SLTP=1)
ELSE
IF (IN (K)> SLT); SLTP =1
ELSE (SLTP =0)
ENDIF
IF ((ALTP)OR(SLTP))
THEN
IF (CPT1 =0) THEN CPT1 =T1
ELSE IF (CPT1>CYC) CPT1= CPT1-CYC
ELSE CPT1 =0
CPT2 =T2
ENDIF
ELSE CPT1 =0
ENDIF
IF (CPT2>CYC) CPT2= CPT2-CYC
ELSE CPT2 =0
ENDIF
IF ((CPT2!=0)OR (CPT1!=0))
THEN LASL = 1
ELSE LASL =0
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. Mand. Advis. First

g Connectio value Data Param. scan
n value value
Inputs
IN input (Turbine Speed). D N 0 to+32000 Y Y
(0 to 320,00 %)
Outputs
RE : output (progressive D Y 0 to+32000 N Y 0
limitation) (0 to 320,00 %)
NACC: Normalised ACCeleration D Y 0 to+32000 N Y 0
(0 to 320,00 %)
PASL: Progressive Acceleration BOOL Y 1 for Progressive Acceleration N Y 0
Speed Limitation indicator Speed Limitation Indicator
LASL: Logical Acceleration Speed BOOL Y 1 for Logical Acceleration N Y 0
Limitation output Speed Limitation
Parame
ters
SFF Speed Filter cut off D N 0 to 2500 N 0 Y
Frequency. (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)
OFF Offset added to filtered D N 0 to+1000 N 0 Y
speed. (0 to 10,00 %)
STI Speed turbine Threshold D N 0 to+12000 N 0 Y
Inhibition. (0 to 120,00 %)
TST Turbine Specific Time. D N 0 to 10000 N 100 Y
(0 to 100,00 s)
AFF Acceleration Filter cut off D N 0 to 2500 N 0 Y
Frequency. (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)
TA1 First Threshold Acceleration D N 0 to+10000 N 1000 Y
for progressive action by G1. (0 to 100.00%) 0
G1 First Gradient for D N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
progressive action, (0 to 100.00)
TA2 Second Threshold D N 0 to+10000 N 1000 Y
Acceleration for progressive (0 to 100.00%) 0
action by G2.
G2 Second Gradient for D N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
progressive action, (0 to 100.00)
SLT Speed turbine Logical action D N 0 to+12000 N 1040 Y
Threshold. (0 to 120,00 %) 0
SLHY Speed turbine Logical action D N 0 to+2000 N 0 Y
Hysteresis. (0 to 20,00 %)
ALT Acceleration turbine Logical D N 0 to+10000 N 1000 Y
action Threshold. (0 to 100.00%) 0
ALTHY Acceleration turbine Logical D N 0 to+2000 N 0 Y
action Hysteresis. (0 to 20.00%)
T1 Time Threshold for D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
prolongation by T2. (0 to 100,00 s)
T2 Prolongation Time if action D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
duration is bigger than T1. (0 to 100,00 s)
9.4 SPECIFICATIONS

ALTP Acceleration Logical Threshold (K-1) B - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

abcd
SLTP Speed Logical Threshold (K-1) B - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

R1P Turbine Speed filter output (K-1) D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
R2P Turbine Speed Max selector output (K-1) D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
R4P Turbine Acceleration filter output (K-1) D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
SFFP Speed Filter cut off Frequency. (K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
Qs Pre-calculated coefficient Qs(K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
AFFP Acceleration Filter cut off Frequency. (K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
Qa Pre-calculated coefficient Qa(K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
CPT1 Internal count for T1 measurement D - Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
CPT2 Internal count for T2 measurement D - Redundant Variable
Internal variables : 2 booleans and 11 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).
Default array
ASLMC().

abcd
Section 10 CD_(I,D) : AUTO / MANU FUNCTION
CD_I Specification version : 1.6 (04/10/2002)

CD_D Specification version : 1.6 (04/10/2002)
10.2 Function
SL TY ty=0 -> %/s; =1 ->%/min
LO, HI
RST
INC
s
0
s
INV
s
∆y=α∗∆n
IND
+∆y
s
DED 0 RE
−∆y
AUTO
s
HL, LL
MAN
MAN=1 -> mode manu ; =0 ->mode auto

abcd
Inputs :
IN : Analogue input to be copied into automatic mode output,
IND : Request logic input + manual,
DED : Request logic input - manual,
RST : Operator output reset logic input,
MAN : Manual mode selection logic input,
INC: Initial Command in MANUAL MODE
INV: Initial Value for MANUAL MODE
Parameterization :
SL : Analogue input slope value in manual mode,
TY: Logic input selecting slope units (0 : %/s ;1 : %/mn)
Outputs :
RE : Result C/D operator.
HL : Logic output; High Limit
LL : Logic output; Low Limit
If RST (K) = 1 Then RE (K) = 0

Else If MAN (K)= 0 (Auto Mode) Then
RE (K) = IN (K).
If(INC(K)==1) REP1000=INV(K)
Else REP1000(K)=IN(K)
Else If DED (K) =1 ET IND (K) =1 Then RE (K) = RE (K-1).
Else If DED (K) =1 AND TY(K) =0 Then
REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)- SL (K) ( %/sec, related to Te).
RE(K)=REP1000(K)
Else If DED (K) =1 AND TY(K) =1 Then
REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)- SL (K) ( %/min, , related to Te).
RE(K)=REP1000(K)
Else If IND (K) =1 AND TY(K) =0 Then
REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)+ SL (K) ( %/sec, , related to Te).
RE(K)=REP1000(K)
Else If IND (K) =1 AND TY(K) =1 Then
REP1000 (K) = REP1000 (K-1)+ SL (K) ( %/min, , related to Te).
RE(K)=REP1000(K)
If RE (K) >= HI Then RE (K) = HI ; HL=1
If RE (K) <= LO Then RE (K) = LO ; LL=1
If HI<=LO Then Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1
Connection value Data parameters scan
value value
Inputs
IN input I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y

abcd
value value
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IND Increase demand BOOL Y N 0 Y
DED Decrease demand BOOL Y N 0 Y
MAN manual order BOOL Y Y Y
INC Initial value selector BOOL Y N 0 Y
INV Second initial value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
RST Reset order BOOL Y N 0 Y
Outputs
RE Result limited between I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y 0
LO and HI (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
HL High Limit BOOL Y N Y - 0
LL Low Limit BOOL Y N Y - 0
Parame
ters
LO © Minimum value for RE : I/D Y -20000 to+ 20000 N -20000 Y
RE>=LO (-200,00 to 0 %)
HI © Maximum value for RE : I/D Y 0 to+20000 N 20000 Y
RE<=HI (0 to 200,00 %)
TY Slope units selector BOOL Y 0 : %/s ;1 : %/mn N 0 Y
SL Slope rate in manual I/D N 0 to+32767 Y Y
mode (0 to 327.67 %/s (if Ty
=0) ; %/mn (if Ty =1)
10.4 Use
10.5 SPECIFICATIONS

REP1000 Internal counter Double 0 R
CD_D().

abcd

abcd
Section 11 COPY_TABLE : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES
COPY_TABLE Specification version : 1.1 (01/19/04)
11.2 Function
This function copy Nb elements from input table to output table when it is validating.
This copy works with offset in both tables
It can be used between different table types (for ex Word table to Double table)
No overflow check.
Inputs :
INP INPut table
OFFIN OFFset for INput table
OFFRE OFFset for output table (RE)
NB NumBer of element to copy
VAL input for VALidate copy
Outputs :
RE : output table
if VAL OR INIT
then
I = OFFIN
J = OFFRE
LIMIT = OFFIN + NB
while {I < LIMIT}
RE(J) = INP(I)
I= I+1
J=J+1
endwhile

abcd
endif

abcd
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Mand Advised First scan value
Connection value . Data paramete
rs value
Inputs
INP Input table (130 TW/TI/TD N -32000 to+32000 Y - Y
elements)
OFFIN Offset in input D N 0-129 N 0 Y
table
OFFIN Offset in input D N 0-129 N 0 Y
table
NB Number of D N 1-130 N 130 Y
elements to copy
VAL Copy validating B Y N 1 Y
input
Outputs
RE Output table (130 TW/TI/TD N -32000 to+32000 Y - Y INP ( Whatever
elements) VAL)
11.4 Use
11.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 3 integers.
if VAL + INIT
then
cal OFFIN = I
cal OFFRE = J
cal OFFIN + NB = LIMIT
while {I < LIMIT}
cal INP(I) = RE(J)
cal I + 1 = I
cal J + 1 = J
endwhile
endif

abcd
none

abcd
Section 12 COPY_TBL7 : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES
COPY_TBL7 Specification version : 1.1 (04/13/04)
12.2 Function
This FB is the same as "COPY_TABLE" with INPut and RE tables of 119 Word lengths.
Inputs :
INP INPut table
Outputs :
RE : output table
if VAL OR INIT
then
I = OFFIN
J = OFFRE
LIMIT = OFFIN + NB
while {I < LIMIT}
if {I < 119}
then
if {J < 119}
then
cal INP(I) = RE(J)

abcd
endif
endif
I= I+1
J=J+1
endwhile
endif
rs value
Inputs
elements)
OFFIN Offset in input W/I/D N 0-118 N 0 Y
table
table
NB Number of W/I/D N 1-119 N 119 Y
elements to copy
input
Outputs
elements) VAL)
12.4 Use
12.5 SPECIFICATIONS
if VAL + INIT
then
cal OFFIN = I
cal OFFRE = J
cal OFFIN + NB = LIMIT
while {I < LIMIT}
if {I < 119}

abcd
then
if {J < 119}
then
cal INP(I) = RE(J)
endif
endif
cal I + 1 = I
cal J + 1 = J
endwhile
endif
none

abcd
Section 13 COPY_TBLRX3I : COPY OF N ELEMENTS OF TABLES
COPY_RX3I Specification version : 1.0 (05/17/06)
13.2 Function
This FB is the same as "COPY_TABLE" with INPut and RE tables of 150 Word lengths.
Inputs :
INP INPut table
Outputs :
RE : output table
if VAL OR INIT
then
I = OFFIN
J = OFFRE
LIMIT = OFFIN + NB
while {I < LIMIT}
if {I < 150}
then
if {J < 150}
then
cal INP(I) = RE(J)
endif

abcd
endif
I= I+1
J=J+1
endwhile
endif
rs value
Inputs
elements)
table
table
NB Number of W/I/D N 1-150 N 150 Y
elements to copy
input
Outputs
elements) VAL)
13.4 Use
13.5 SPECIFICATIONS
none

abcd
Section 14 CSAM_(I,D) : CONTROL STATION AUTOMATIC / MANUAL
CSAM_I Specification version : 1.3 (06/05/01)

CSAM _D Specification version : 1.3 (06/05/01)
14.2 Function
Description : Control and set point station with CENTRALOG interface.

Inputs :
INM : Analogue input for manual mode (from CENTRALOG),
INA : Analogue input for automatic mode,
MS : Manual mode selection, (pulse from CENTRALOG)
AS : Automatic mode selection, (pulse from CENTRALOG)
MFC : Manual/Auto mode Forcing command,
SMF : Selection of Mode to be Forced,
FV : Forcing Value,
FVC : Forcing Value command,
GI : Galvanometer Input Value,
Outputs :
RE : Result CSAM operator.
ST : State Manual indication, 0=> Auto; 1=> Manu
AMFS : Auto Manual Forcing State, 0=> No; 1=> Forced
FVS : Forcing Value State, 0=> No; 1=> Forced
GO : Galvanometer output

abcd
IF INIT (System INIT)

ST = 1 ;RE = 0;GO = 0; FVS =0; AMFS =0;INM_P=INM.
ELSE
GO = GI; FVS =0; AMFS =0
IF (MS !=AS) THEN (Pulse from CENTRALOG)
IF (MS !=0) THEN ST(K) = 1 (Manual selection pulse from CENTRALOG)
ELSE IF (AS !=0) THEN ST(K) = 0 (Auto selection pulse from CENTRALOG)
IF (ST(K) !=0) THEN (Manual mode)
IF (INM_P != INM ) THEN
RE = INM (Manual input valid);
INM_P=INM;
ELSE RE = INA (Auto mode)
IF (MFC !=0) THEN
AMFS=1
IF (SMF !=0) THEN
ST(K) = 1 ;
IF (INM_P != INM ) RE = INM (Forcing manual mode) ; INM_P=INM;
ELSE RE = INA (Forcing Auto mode) ; ST(K) = 0;
IF (FVC !=0) THEN RE = FV; FVS = 1
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. value Man Advised First
g Connec d. parameters scan
tion Data value value
Inputs
INM Analogue input for manual mode I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
output. (from CENTRALOG) (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
INA Analogue input for automatic I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
mode output. (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
MS Manual mode selection, (pulse BOOL Y N 0 Y
from CENTRALOG)
AS Automatic mode selection, (pulse BOOL Y N 0 Y
from CENTRALOG)
MFC Manual/Auto mode Forcing BOOL Y N 0 Y
command,
SMF Selection of Mode to be Forced, BOOL Y N 0 Y
FV Forcing Value I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
FVC Forcing Value command BOOL Y N 0 Y
GI Galvanometer Input Value I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Outputs
RE Result CSAM operator. I/D. Y -20000 to 20000 Y Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ST State Manual indication,1=> BOOL. Y - N Y 1
Manual mode
AMFS Auto Manual Forcing State, 0=> No; BOOL. Y - N Y 0
1=> Forced
FVS Forcing Value State, 0=> No; 1=> BOOL. Y - N Y 0
Forced
GO Galvanometer output with GI I/D N -20000 to 20000 N Y 0
value (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Paramet
ers

abcd
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. value Man Advised First
g Connec d. parameters scan
tion Data value value
14.4 Use
14.5 SPECIFICATIONS

ST State Manual indication,1=> Manual mode BOOL. 1 R
Last Analogue input for manual mode
INM_P D INM R
output. (from CENTRALOG)
Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 2 doubles (amongst which 1
state variable).
CSAM_D().

abcd
Section 15 CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS : CLEAR THE FAULTS OF CONTROLLER
CLEAR_CTL_FAULT Specification version : 1.0 (09/26/06)
15.1 REPRESENTATION
15.2 FUNCTION
This function block will clear the fault table, (like P80 software), according the value of
CL_PLC (1) and/or of CL_IO (1) variables. The output DF will return 1 if successful and 0 if
unsuccessfull.
15.3 ARGUMENTS CHARACTERISTICS
value value
Inputs
CL_PLC Input D Y - N - N - -
CL_IO Input D Y - N - N - -
Outputs
DF Default D N - N - Y - -
15.4 USE :
• Parameters to initialize :
None
• Scheme :
It is necessary to use a TP_D block on the inputs CL_PLC et CL_IO, (with 1 second like
parameter) to avoid a re-triggering more than once per second.

abcd
• Associated FGT :
None
15.5 SPECIFICATION
15.5.1 Internal Variables and State variables
• 5 booleans.
15.5.2 Function block code
15.5.3 Basic function used
CLEAR_CTL_FAULTS().

abcd
Section 16 DBF_D : DEAD BAND FUNCTION
DBF_D Specification version : 1.4 (01/25/01)
16.1 REPRESENTATION
TY 1 TY <>1
VAV
VAV
MIN MAX
MIN
MAX
IN IN
RE RE
16.2 FUNCTION
This function block calculates the value of output RE based on the standardized input IN.
There is two type of dead band, and for the both types the MAX corresponds at the positive
gap and MIN corresponds at the negative gap:
The first is : The output RE is equal to VAL if input IN is inside the range of (VAL - | MIN | )
and (VAL - | MAX | ), and outside this range the output RE is equal input IN.
The second is : The output RE is equal to VAL if input IN is inside the range of (VAL - | MIN
| ) and (VAL - | MAX | ). Outside this range the output RE is equal to (IN + | MIN | ) if input
IN is lower than (VAL - | MIN | ) and output RE is equal to (IN - | MAX |) if input IN is higher
than (VAL + | MAX | ).

abcd
Case of TY = 1
If VAL - | MIN| ≤ IN ≤ VAL + | MAX| Then

RE = VAL
Else RE = IN
Endif
Case of TY <> 1
If IN < VAL - | MIN| Then
RE = IN + | MIN|
Else If VAL - | MIN| ≤ IN ≤ VAL + | MAX| Then
RE = VAL
Else RE = IN - | MAX|
Endif
Endif
value value
Inputs
IN Input W,I,L,D N - Y - Y - -
Outputs
RE Result W,I,L,D N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
TY Type of dead band B N - N 1 Y - -
MIN Negative gap W,L N ≥0 Y - Y - -
related to VAL
MAX Positive gap related W,L N ≥0 Y - Y - -
to VAL
VAL Value of RE inside W,I,L,D N - N 0 Y - -
the dead band

abcd
16.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None
16.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 1 double.
DBF_D().

abcd
Section 17 DER_D : DIFFERENTIATOR
DER_D Specification version : 1.1 (12/18/00)
17.2 Function
This block has the Laplace Transfer Function as follows :

Td * s
F (s) =
1 + Tf * s
• INITIALIZATION : The Init value of the output is 0, like the state variable.
• NORMAL OPERATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal
operation of the Laplace Transfer Function : the derivative action time constant Td may
be written as a variable above the symbol or as an optional input parameter to the
function block. The filtering time constant Tf is an optional parameter. If no value is
specified, it is assumed to be 3*Ts(Tsampling).
value value
Inputs
IN Input ANY_NUM Y ]− ∞;+∞[ Y - N - -
Outputs Output or
RE Result ANY_NUM N ]− ∞;+∞[ Y - Y - 0
Parameters
Derivative
INT [0; ∞[ 100 = 1s
Td time DINT N [0; ∞[ 100 = 1s Y - N - -
constant REAL [0; ∞[
Filtering
INT [0; ∞[ 100 = 1s
Tf time DINT N [0; ∞[ 100 = 1s N 3 x Ts Y ≥ 3 × Ts -

abcd
constant REAL [0; ∞[

This block can be real, integer or double integer.
IN, Re, Td & Tf are the same type for each type of block.
17.4 Use
• Tf to 3 Tsampling if Tf doesn’t exist.
IN : INPUT : ANY_NUM input, IN1 mandatory.

RE : OUTPUT : ANY_NUM output, mandatory.
Td : DERIVATIVE ACTION TIME CONSTANT: ANY_NUM input.
Tf : FILTERING TIME CONSTANT: ANY_NUM input.
- Td and Tf are User parameters : Td is mandatory, but not Tf.

This block is not an historical block.
Associated FGT :
None.
Scheme
IN -
* * +
* + 1
Td
1/x Ts +
Tf z
Gain 0
RE

abcd
17.5 Specification :
The output of Z-1 block is a state variable.
Internal variables : 4 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).
None.
DER_D().

abcd
Section 18 DIVMC_(I,D) : DIVISION
DIVMC _I Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00)

DIVMC _D Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00)
18.2 Function
Inputs :
NU : Numerator,
DE : Denominator,
Outputs :
RE : Analogue output
ENO : Output Error
ENO = 0
IF ( NU<-32000 ) THEN ENO = 1 ; NU=-32000 ENDIF
IF ( NU > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; NU= 32000 ENDIF
IF ( DE<-32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; DE=-32000 ENDIF
IF ( DE > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; DE= 32000 ENDIF
IF (NU=0) RE = 0
ELSE
IF (DE=0) ( forbiden case )
THEN ENO = 1 RE = (signe of NU)*32000
ELSE
RE = (NU*10000)/ DE ( in double length)
IF (RE < -32000 ) THEN ENO = 1; RE = -32000 ENDIF
IF (RE > 32000 ) THEN ENO = 1; RE = 32000 ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
value value
Inputs
NU Numerator I/D Y -32000 to+32000 Y - Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
DE Denominator I/D Y -32000 to+32000 Y - Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
Outputs
RE Output I/D N -32000 to+32000 Y - Y 0
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
ENO Output Error BOOL N 1 = Output Error N - Y 0
or input out of range
18.4 Use
18.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 2 doubles.
DIVMC_D().

abcd
Section 19 DMOF : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT THAT MAY DEPENDS ON

FEEDBACK
DMOF Specification version : 1.0 (10/24/03)
19.1 REPRESENTATION
19.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls an electrical actuator with 1 or 2 logic orders commands without
intermediate position feedback but with possibility to stop moving at any position in middle
travel.The commande are reset when the corresponding feedback is reached.
• INITIALIZATION :
The treatment is set in accordance to [INIT] parameter :
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in actuator OFF state
with the output [OFF_C] set to 1.

abcd
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in actuator ON state with
the output [ON_C] set to 1.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the treatment is initialized in accordance with
the actuator position (the actuator stays ON or OFF without OFF or ON orders).
• NORMAL OPERATION :
After an ON demand (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and if release ON [REL_ON] is
present, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C]. The ON feedback [ON] confirms
the actuator ON [ON_ST] and resets ON order [ON_C] .
After a OFF demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OFF_DMD] and if release OFF [REL_OFF] is
present, the actuator OFF order is transmitted [OFF_C]. The OFF feedback [OFF]
confirms the actuator OFF [OFF_ST] and resets OFF order [OFF_C].
If the two demands (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and [A(M)_OFF_DMD] are present
at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_OFF_DMD] have
priority.
If the treatment releases a OFF or ON demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand
before the end of current stroke.
The orders [ON ORD] and [OFF_C] are exclusives.
During ON or OFF moving it’s possible to send stop [STOP]. In this case, the ON order
[ON_C] and OFF order [OFF_C] are reset and stop state is active [STP_ST] then ON
time [ON_T] and OFF time [OFF_T] are suspended. After taking away the stop request
the function will react again, ON order, OFF order and monitoring time are unlocked and
it’s possible to reverse the moving, in this last case, the time are reinitiated and stop state
is deactivated [STP_ST].
• SAFETY OPERATION :
The SAFETY OPERATION has highest priority and does no need release
condition even if disturb [DIST] input is present.
- ACTUATOR SAFETY POSITION
If safety ON (latched) [SAF_ON] is set, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C] and
the treatment becomes in safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST].
If safety OFF (latched) [SAF_OFF] is set, the actuator OFF order is transmitted, [OFF_C]
and the treatment becomes in safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST].
If the two demands [SAF_ON] and [SAF_OFF] are present at the same time, it’s
[SAF_OFF] priority.
During the safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] the actuator ON order is permanent [ON_C].
During the safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] the actuator OFF order is permanent
[OFF_C].
- SAFETY POSITION ACKNOWLEDGES :

abcd
If the treatment is in safety [SAF_ON_ST] or [SAF_OFF_ST], and the [SAF_ON] and

[SAF_OFF] are no more existing then after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] the actuator
returns to normal operation.
• DEGRADED OPERATION :
- ACTUATOR IN PROBLEM
The state problem [PROBLEM] lock the AUTO and MANUAL command.
If the control cell is disturbed [DIST] presence the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM] and both orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are reset.
- ACTUATOR DISCREPANCY
The states discrepancy [DISC_ON] and [DISC_OFF] is just information and has no
infuence on the command.
If the actuator is in ON state [ON_ST] or safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] and [ON] is lost
or [OFF] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].
If the actuator is in OFF state [OFF_ST] or safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] and [OFF]
is lost or [ON] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].
If the real ON time (contactor response time [ON]) is superior to the ON time [ON_T]
parameter then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].
Ifthe real OFF time (contactor response time [OFF]) is superior to the OFF time [OFF_T]
parameter, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].
[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the feedback after ON or
OFF order. If the real feedback disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T] parameter
then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON] or [DISC_OFF] in function of the
current command.
- ACTUATOR IN STOP ( e.g :Torque limitswitch )
The torque limitswitch should be connected on stop input [STP].
If the feedback stop input [STP] is present then both orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are
reset ( pulse 1s ) after the dirve is able to take in account new command even if the stop
input [STP] is always present.
- PROBLEM ACKNOWLEDGES :
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DIST] and not [STP]
combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the actuator in problem state and allows a return to
normal operation.
• ONE OUTPUT ODER CONFIGURATION :

If the parameter [SOL1] is set then the drive can be used for the actuator with only one
order. This single order is [ON_C] like monostable output. It is set when the normal
command ON or safety ON are fullfilled and it’s only reset by reverse command OFF or
safety OFF when fullfilled.

abcd
The problem state [PROBLEM], the discrepancy state [DISC_ON], [DISC_OFF] the
torque function [STP] have no action on this output.
• TRANSCIENT OPERATION :
The functional states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST], [SAF_ON_ST], [SAF_OFF_ST] and
[PROBLEM] are exclusives.
During safety ON or safety OFF phase the functional state [SAF_ON_ST],
[SAF_OFF_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_ON], [SAF_OFF] disappear
and after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] then to return in normal mode.
During ON and OFF phases (waiting feedback response or feedback lost), the functional
states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.
When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, it
waits a demand or a feedback return to place it in the corespondent functional states.
• LOCAL MODE :
When the input [LOC] is set the drive goes in local state [LOC_ST] , during this state the
orders from drive to actuator have no effect and the drive follow the physical status. To
come back in normal operation under AUTO, MANU, SAFETY control then the input
[LOC] should not more present, and the his state should be acknowledge with
[ACK_DMD].
• GENERATION OF ALARMS, OF VISUALISATION INFO AND MISCELLANEOUS :
The [CUR_STEP] data indicates the current step of the treatment sequence.
The [MCNE] signal is an alarm, it’s result of manual command witch is not reached.
The [SCA] signal is an alarm, it’s result of safety condition in operation.
The [DISC_OFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between OFF command
and OFF feedback.
The [DISC_ON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between ON command and
ON feedback.
The [DLOCOFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive ON
command and local OFF feedback.
The [DLOCON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive OFF
command and local ON feedback.
The [LOCEX] signal is an alarm used to inform operator that the drive is no more in local
and it should be acknowledge to come back in remote control mode.
The [DIST_ST] signal is a global alarm, result of or between [PROBLEM], [DISC_ON],
[DISC_OFF], [MCNE], [SCA], [STP_ST], [STP], [DLOCOFF], [DLOCON], [LOCEX] and
apparition of local demand [LOC].
In each step it’s possible to reset the sequence at step 1 when [RESET] = 1.
• GENERALITY :

abcd
If the input [ON] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (ON time
and disengaging time are not used). In this case the ON order is present as long as the
demand is present.
If the input [OFF] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (OFF time
and disengaging time are not used). In this case the OFF order is present as long as the
demand is present.
value value
Inputs
A_ON_DMD Auto ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_ON_DMD Manu ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_ON Release ON B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_ON Safety ON B N - N 0 Y - -
A_OFF_DMD Auto OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
M_OFF_DMD Manu OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_OFF Release OFF B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_OFF Safety OFF B N - N 0 Y - -
ACK_DMD Acknowledge dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
STOP Stop demand B N - N 0 Y - -
ON Fdc ON B Y - N (*) N -
OFF Fdc OFF B Y - N (*) N -
DIST Disturbed ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -
LOC Local mode ( MCC) B Y - N 0 Y - -
STP Stop signal ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -
used for torque
Outputs
CUR_STEP Current step W N [ 1 – 1000 ] N - Y - 1
ON_ST ON state B N N - Y - 0
OFF_ST OFF state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_OFF_ST Safety OFF state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_ON_ST Safety ON state B N N - Y - 0
STOP_ST Stop state B N N - Y - 0
LOC_ST Local state B N N - Y - 0
PROBLEM Actuator in problem B N N - Y - 0
DIST_ST Actuator in B N Y - Y - 0
disturbance

abcd
value value
HMI_ST Drive state for HMI W N N - Y - 0
animation
MCNE Manual command B N N - Y - 0
not effective
SCA Safety condition B N N - Y - 0
active
DISC_OFF Normal value ON B N N - Y - 0
actual value OFF
DISC_ON Normal value OFF B N N - Y - 0
actual value ON
DLOCON Drive normally OFF B N N - Y - 0
and local ON
DLOCOFF Drive normally OFF B N N - Y - 0
and local ON
LOCEX Local operation exit B N N - Y - 0
ON_C ON order B N N - Y - 0
OFF_C OFF order B N N - Y - 0
STP_C Stop order B Y N - Y - 0
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
SOL1 Selection 1 order B N - N 0 Y - -
RESET Reset sequence to B N - N 0 Y - -
step 1
INIT Initial value W N {0,1,2} Y - Y - -
OFF_T Feedback response W N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
time after an OFF 100 = 1 s
demand
ON_T Feedback response W N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
time after an ON 100 = 1 s
demand
DES_T Feedback W N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
disengaging time 100 = 1 s
after an ON or OFF
demand
(*) See CONFIGURATION chapter.
19.4 CONFIGURATION
• TYPE BKR : Circuit breaker

Without STOP command.
With parameter [SOL1] at 0
• TYPE EI1, EI2 : Electrical actuator with integrated control
With or Without STOP command.

abcd
• TYPE EM1, EM2 : Electric actuator without integrated control.

With or Without STOP command.
• TYPE MO1U, FCU or MO3U : Motor for Pump, Fan or electrical heater ( also for
package system )
- Without test feedback from MCC, with only ON feedback and 1 order.
• TYPE SOL1A, SOL1AU : Single coil solenoid with feedback
With or Without DIST signal.
• TYPE SOL1B, SOL1BU : Single coil solenoid without feedback
• TYPE SOL2A, SOL2AU : Dual coil solenoid with feedback
• TYPE SOL2B, SOL2BU : Dual coil solenoid without feedback
• Precedent type with one feedback missing (ON or OFF).
If [ON] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not
applied.
If [OFF] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not
applied.

abcd
• USE :
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None
19.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables :
• 17 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 10 integers and 17 words (amongst
which 4 state variables) for DMOF.
None.
DMOF().

abcd
Section 20 DMOS : DRIVE MODULE WITH OUTPUT STORED
DMOS Specification version : 1.0 (10/24/03)
20.1 REPRESENTATION
20.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls actuator with 1 or 2 orders commands without intermediate position
switch, The command memory are never reset throug feedback, the commanded output
signal only changes when the request command changes.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set actuator OFF state with
the output [OFF_C] set to 1.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set actuator ON state with the
output [ON_C] set to 1.

abcd
the actuator position (the actuator stays ON or OFF without ON or OFF orders).
After a start demand (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and if release starting [REL_ON] is
present, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C]. The contactor return [ON]
confirms the actuator ON [ON_ST] and ON order stay active [ON_C] until reverse
command.
After a OFF demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OFF_DMD] and if release OFF [REL_OFF] is
present, the actuator OFF order is transmitted [OFF_C]. The contactor return [OFF]
confirms the actuator OFF [OFF_ST] and OFF order stay active [OFF_C] until reverse
command.
If the two demands [A(M)_ON_DMD] and [A(M)_OFF_DMD] are present at the same
time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_OFF_DMD] have priority.
If the treatment realizes a OFF or ON demand, it is possible to have the reverse demand
after the output [ON_C] or [OFF_C] is no more presents.
The orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are exclusives.
condition even if disturb [DIST] input is present.

If safety ON (latched) [SAF_ON] is set, the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C] and
the treatment becomes in safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST].
If safety OFF (latched) [SAF_OFF] is set, the actuator OFF order is transmitted, [OFF_C]
and the treatment becomes in safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST].
[SAF_OFF] priority.
During the safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] the actuator ON order is permanent [ON_C].
During the safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] the actuator OFF order is permanent
[OFF_C].
- SAFETY POSITION ACKNOWLEDGES:
[SAF_OFF] are no more existing then after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] the actuator
returns to normal operation.
The state problem [PROBLEM] lock the AUTO and MANUAL command.

abcd
If the control cell is disturbed [DIST] presence the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM] and both orders [ON_C] and [OFF_C] are reset..
- ACTUATOR DISCREPANCY
The states discrepancy [DISC_ON] and [DISC_OFF] is just information and has no
infuence on the command.
If the actuator is in ON state [ON_ST] or safety ON state [SAF_ON_ST] and [ON] is lost
or [OFF] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].
If the actuator is in OFF state [OFF_ST] or safety OFF state [SAF_OFF_ST] and [OFF]
is lost or [ON] is present, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].
If the real ON time (contactor response time [ON]) is superior to the ON time [ON_T]
parameter then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON].
Ifthe real OFF time (contactor response time [OFF]) is superior to the OFF time [OFF_T]
parameter, then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_OFF].
[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the feedback after ON or
OFF order. If the real feedback disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T] parameter
then the treatment becomes in discrepancy [DISC_ON] or [DISC_OFF] in function of the
current command.
- PROBLEM ACKNOWLEDGES:
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DIST] combined with
[ACK_DMD] resets the actuator in problem state and allows a return to normal operation.
During safety ON or safety OFF phase the functional state [SAF_ON_ST],
[SAF_OFF_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_ON], [SAF_OFF] disappear
and after acknowledge [ACK_DMD] then to return in normal mode.
During ON and OFF phases (waiting feedback response or feedback lost), the functional
states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.
• LOCAL MODE :
When the input [LOC] is set the drive goes in local state [LOC_ST] , during this state the
orders from drive to actuator have no effect and the drive follow the physical status. To
come back in normal operation under AUTO, MANU, SAFETY control then the input
[LOC] should not more present, and the his state should be acknowledge with
[ACK_DMD].
• RECLOSE OPTION :
When the reclose command OFF [RC_OFF] is set the actuator OFF order is transmitted,
[OFF_C] until reverse command even if the reclose command OFF [RC_OFF] is present.
The signal [RC_OFF] is send to alarm directly.

abcd
When the reclose command ON [RC_ON] is set and if there is no reclose command OFF
[RC_OFF] and no OFF command [SAF_OFF], [A(M)_ON_DMD]&[REL_OFF] since
reclose time [RC_TIME] the actuator ON order is transmitted, [ON_C] until reverse
command even if the reclose command ON [RC_ON] is present.
The [MCNE] signal is an alarm, it’s result of manual command witch is not reached.
The [SCA] signal is an alarm, it’s result of safety condition in operation.
The [DISC_OFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between OFF command
and OFF feedback.
The [DISC_ON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between ON command and
ON feedback.
The [DLOCOFF] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive ON
command and local OFF feedback.
The [DLOCON] signal is an alarm, it’s result of discrepancy between drive OFF
command and local ON feedback.
The [LOCEX] signal is an alarm used to inform operator that the drive is no more in local
and it should be acknowledge to come back in remote control mode .
The [DIST_ST] signal is a global alarm, result of or between [PROBLEM], [DISC_ON],
[DISC_OFF], [MCNE], [SCA], [RC_OFF], [DLOCOFF], [DLOCON], [LOCEX] and
apparition of local demand [LOC].
value value
Inputs
A_ON_DMD Auto ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_ON_DMD Manu ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_ON Release ON B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_ON Safety ON B N - N 0 Y - -
A_OFF_DMD Auto OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
M_OFF_DMD Manu OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_OFF Release OFF B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_OFF Safety OFF B N - N 0 Y - -
ACK_DMD acknowledge dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

abcd
value value
RC_ON Reclose ON dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
RC_OFF Reclose OFF dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
ON Fdc ON B Y - N (*) N -
OFF Fdc OFF B Y - N (*) N -
DIST Disturbed ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -
LOC Local mode ( MCC) B Y - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
ON_ST ON state B N N - Y - 0
OFF_ST OFF state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_OFF_ST Safety OFF state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_ON_ST Safety ON state B N N - Y - 0
PROBLEM Actuator in problem B N N - Y - 0
DIST_ST Actuator in B N Y - Y - 0
disturbance
LOC_ST Local state B N N - Y - 0
HMI_ST Dive state for HMI W N N - Y - 0
animation
MCNE Manual command B N N - Y - 0
not effective
SCA Safety condition B N N - Y - 0
active
DISC_OFF Normal value ON B N N - Y - 0
actual value OFF
DISC_ON Normal value OFF B N N - Y - 0
actual value ON
DLOCON Drive normally OFF B N N - Y - 0
and local ON
DLOCOFF Drive normally OFF B N N - Y - 0
and local ON
LOCEX Local operation exit B N N - Y - 0
ON_C ON order B N N - Y - 0
OFF_C OFF order B N N - Y - 0
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
step 1
OFF_T Contactor response D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
time after an OFF 100 = 1s
demand
ON_T Contactor response D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
time after an ON 100 = 1s
demand

abcd
value value
DES_T Contactor D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
disengaging time 100 = 1s
after an ON or OFF
demand
RC_T Reclosing time D N Unit 0.01s N - Y - -
100 = 1s
20.4 CONFIGURATION
• TYPE LC1 : Local control for package system

- It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.
• TYPE MO1 or FC : Motor for Pump, Fan or electrical heater ( also for package system )
- Without test feedback from MCC, and 2 orders.
• TYPE MO1U, FCU or MO3U : Motor for Pump, Fan or electrical heater ( also for
package system )
- Without test feedback from MCC, with only ON feedback and 1 order.
• Precedent type with one feedback missing (ON or OFF).
The position feedback is calculated as following:
- Without position feedback :
If [ON] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created
outside the block.
If [OFF] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created
outside the block.
• USE
Not applicable.
• Scheme :
None.

abcd
20.5 SPECIFICATION
• 17 booleans (amongst which 5 state variables), 10 integers and 18 words (amongst which 5
state variables) for DMOS.
None.
DMOS().

abcd
Section 21 DOIO : DO_IO FUNCTION OF CTOOLKIT
DOIO Specification version : 1.2 (03/08/02)
21.2 Function
This function is used to update inputs or outputs for one scan while the program is running. It
can be used to update selected I/O during the program, in addition to the normal I/O scan.
If input references are specified, the function allows the most recent values of inputs to be
obtained for program logic. If output references are specified, PLCC_do_io updates outputs based
on the most current values stored in I/O memory. I/O points are serviced in increments of entire I/O
modules; the PLC adjusts the references, if necessary that are not configured.
Inputs :
VLD : Block validation : the block is executed only if VLD is set to 1;
MEMSTART : Start (offset), of memory zone to be updated, is one based :
• in units of words for word types (%AI, %AQ, %R) ;
• in units of bits for bit types (%I, %Q) : discrete offsets are in bits and must be
byte aligned : 1, 9, 17, 25, … are valid for offsets, but 2-8, 10-16, 18-24, 26-
32, … are invalid.
•
LENGHT : Lenght, of the reading/writing zone, is one based :
• in units of words for word types (%AI, %AQ, %R) ;
• in units of bits for bit types (%I, %Q) : discrete lengths are in bits and must be
byte aligned : 8, 16, 24, 32, … are valid for lenghts, but 1-7, 9-15, 17-23, 25-
31, … are invalid.
Parameter :
MEMTYPE : Type of memory zone to be updated :
• 1 for %I,

abcd
• 2 for %Q,
• 3 for %R,
• 4 for %AI,
• 5 for %AQ;
Outputs :
ENO : Output Error : This output is set to 1 if there is an error
on the DOIO function or if the MEMTYPE is bad (<1 or >5).
value value
Inputs
VLD Block BOOL N 1 = Block executed Y - Y
validation
MEMSTART Start of
memory
W N
[0; ∞[ N 0 Y
LENGTH Length of
memory
W N
[0; ∞[ N 0 Y
Outputs
ENO Output BOOL N 1 = DOIO Error N - Y
Error or MEMSTART out of
range
Parameters
MEMTYPE Type of W N [1,…,5] Y - Y
memory
21.4 Use
21.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 1 boolean.

abcd
DOIO().

abcd
Section 22 EA2 / EA2W : ELECTRIC ACTUATOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS

COMMAND

abcd
22.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
22.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls an electrical actuator with 2 logic orders commands without
intermediate position switch but with possibility to stop moving at any position in middle
travel.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in actuator closed state
with the output [CLG_ORDER] set to 1.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in actuator opened state
with the output [OPG_ORDER] set to 1.
the actuator position (the actuator stays opened or closed without closing or opening
orders).
After an opening demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and if release opening
[REL_OPG] is present, the actuator opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER]. The
open limit switch [OPD] confirms the actuator opened [OPG_ST] and resets opening
order [OPG_ORDER] .
After a closing demand (non-latched) [A(M)_CLG_DMD] and if release closing
[REL_CLG] is present, the actuator closing order is transmitted [CLG_ORDER]. The
close limit switch [CLD] confirms the actuator closed [CLG_ST] and resets closing order
[CLG_ORDER].
If the two demands (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and [A(M)_CLG_DMD] are present
at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_CLG_DMD] have
priority.
If the treatment releases a closing or opening demand, it is possible to have the reverse
demand after the output [OPG_ORDER] or [CLG_ORDER] is no more present.
The orders [OPG ORDER] and [CLG_ORDER] are exculsives.
During opening or closing moving it’s possible to send stop [STOP]. In this case, the
opening order [OPG_ORDER], closing order [CLG_ORDER], opening time [OPG_T],
and closing time [CLG_T] are suspended. After taking away the stop request the function
will react again, opening order, closing order and monitoring time are unlocked and it’s
possible to reverse the moving, in this last case, the time are reinitiated.
condition.

abcd
If safety opening (latched) [SAF_OPG] is set, the actuator opening order is transmitted,
[OPG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch open [OPD] is true. the treatment
becomes in safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] as long as safety opening
[SAF_OPG] is set.
If safety closing (latched) [SAF_CLG] is set, the actuator closing order is transmitted,
[CLG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch close [CLDD] is true. the treatment
becomes in safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] as long as safety closing [SAF_CLG] is
set.
If the two demands [SAF_OPG] and [SAF_CLG] are present at the same time, it’s
[SAF_CLG] priority.
- SAFETY POSITION ACKNOWLEDGES :
If the treatment is in safety [SAF_OPG_ST] or [SAF_CLG_ST], and the [SAF_OPG] and
[SAF_CLG] are no more existing, actuatorthen the actuator returns to normal operation.
If the control cell is disturbed, [DISTURB] or [TORQUE] presence, the treatment
becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the actuator is in opening [OPG_ST] or safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] and limit
switch [OPD] is lost or [CLD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
If the actuator is in closing [CLG_ST] safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] and limit
switch [CLD] is lost or [OPD] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
If the real opening time (limit switch time [OPD]) is superior to the opening time [OPG_T]
parameter or the real closing time (limit switch time [CLD]) is superior to the closing time
[CLG_T] parameter, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the limit switch after
opening or closing order. If the real limit switch disengaging time is superior to the
[DES_T] parameter then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the actuator opened limit switch is defected [OPD_DEF] or the actuator closed limit
switch is defected [CLD_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the actuator opened limit switch [OPD] is present at the same time than the actuator
closed limit switch [CLD] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the actuator order (closing or opening) is
unchanged, only [PROBLEM] output is present.
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] and not
[TORQUE] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the actuator in problem state and allows a
return to normal operation.

abcd
The functional states [OPG_ST], [CLG_ST], [SAF_OPG_ST], [SAF_CLG_ST] and
During safety opening or safety closing phase the functional state [SAF_OPG_ST],
[SAF_CLG_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_OPG], [SAF_CLG]
disappear.
During opening and closing phases (waiting limit switch response or limit switch lost), the
functional states [OPG_ST], [CLG_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.
waits a demand or a limit switch return to place it in the corespondent functional states.
If the actuator moves after an opening or closing demand and the treatment receives the
reverse demand, then is not accepted.

The [TORQUE] signal is an alarm, the protection is done in the MCC. If it’s necessary to
create alarm, then this must be done outside the block.
The [CUR_CLG_T] data indicates the current value of closing time, this value is in unit
0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [CLG_T] and decrease until 0.
The [CUR_OPG_T] data indicates the current value of opening time, this value is in unit
0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [OPG_T] and decrease until 0.
The [CUR_DES_T] data indicates the current value of disengaging time, this value is in
unit 0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [DES_T] and decrease until 0.
• GENERALITY :
If the input [OPD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (opening
time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the opening order is present as
long as the demand is present.
If the input [CLD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (closing
time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the closing order is present as long
as the demand is present.
value value
Inputs

abcd
value value
A_OPG_DMD Auto opening dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_OPG_DMD Manu opening dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_OPG Release opening B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_OPG Safety opening B N - N 0 Y - -
A_CLG_DMD Auto closing dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
M_CLG_DMD Manu closing dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_CLG Release closing B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_CLG Safety closing B N - N 0 Y - -
OPD Fdc open B N - N (*) N -
OPD_DEF 1 = Fdc open OPD B Y - N 0 Y - -
defect
CLD Fdc closed B N - N (*) N -
CLD_DEF 1 = Fdc closed CLD B Y - N 0 Y - -
defect
DISTURB Disturbed ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -
STOP Stop demand B N - N 0 Y - -
TORQUE Torque signal B N - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
OPG_ST Opening state B N N - Y - 0
CLG_ST Closing state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_CLG_ST Safety closing state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_OPG_ST Safety opening B N N - Y - 0
state
STOP_ST Stop state B N N - Y - 0
PROBLEM Actuator in problem B N Y - Y - 0
OPG_ORDER Opening order B N Y - Y - 0
CLG_ORDER Closing order B N Y - Y - 0
CUR_CLG_T Current value of D N N - Y - -
closing time in
decreasing way
CUR_OPG_T Current value of D N N - Y - -
opening time in
decreasing way
CUR_DES_T Current value of D N N - Y - -
disengaging time in
decreasing way
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
step 1

abcd
value value
CLG_T Limit switch D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
response time after 100 = 1 s
an closing demand
OPG_T Limit switch D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
response time after 100 = 1 s
an opening demand
DES_T Limit switch D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
disengaging time 100 = 1 s
after an opening or
closing demand
22.4 CONFIGURATION
• TYPE EI1 :
Electric actuator with integrated control also applicable for packaged system.
• TYPE EM1 :
Electric actuator without integrated control.
If [OPD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not
applied.
If [CLD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not
applied.
• USE :
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None

abcd
22.5 SPECIFICATION
• 14 booleans (amongst which 2 state variables), 12 doubles (amongst which 3 state
variables), 10 integers and 3 words (amongst which 1 state variable) for EA2;
• 14 booleans (amongst which 2 state variables), 9 doubles, 10 integers and 3 words
(amongst which 4 state variables) for EA2W;
EA2().

abcd
Section 23 ENTHALPY_D : ENTHALPY CALCULATION
ENTHALPY_D Specification version : 1.1 (07/30/01)
23.2 Function
Calculation of the enthalpy and the specific volume in range of temperature between 100°C and
600°C, in function of the pressure the water or steam equation is used. State found by the state
change .
Inputs :
PI : steam pressure in percent,
TI : steam temperature in percent,
SP_PR : speed or precision of calculation
Outputs :
H: enthalpy in percent
HV : enthalpy in KJ/KG
ENO : Output Error
WP : Water Phase (1 = water , 0 = steam)
Parameterisation :
PR stream reference pressure in Bars abs,
TR stream reference temperature in °C
Hysteresis 1 bar and 1 °C
Local constants for steam :

R = .0134992 D = 6.70126 E-4 CC = 1.55108
A = .0047331 E = 3.17362 E-5 DD = 1.26591
B = 2.93945 E-3 F = 8.06867 E-5 EE = 1.32735
C = 4.35507 E-6
SIG0 = .0000276

abcd
A0=2003.3277 A1=1169.8648 A2=-8.05536

A3=73.76581 A4=-13.02668
IH=22128.7
TLIM = 600 °C TMIN = 100 °C
Local variables for steam:
SIG, TO,
TO2, TO3, TO4, TO7, TO14, TO282, TO32
E1, E2, E3, V0, V1, V2,T,P
Local constants for water :

B0=-37444.869 B1=466453.37 B2=-2666876.8 B3= 9030271.5
B4=-19769400 B5= 28949240 B6=-28309933 B7= 17808942 B8= -
6534676 B9=1065198.5
II=22128.7 L =7.241165e-5 M = 0.7676621 N=1.052358e-11
ff=3.7e8 Gg= 3.122199e8 hh= 199985 kk=1.72
ll=1.362926e16 Nn=0.6537154 Q=6.1191876e-17 qq=62.5
rr=13.10268 Uu=5.8620689e-1 ww=4.1666667e-1 yy=1.0226748e-16
zz=1.5108e-5
Local variables for steam:
The Parameters PR and TR cannot be changed after the initialisation.

The calculation without specific size for double integer calculation is:
ENO = 0
WP(K-1) = WP
IF INIT OR HV = 0 OR WP != WP(K-1) THEN
IF TR > TLIM OR TR < TMIN THEN
HV = 0
VV = 0
ENO = 1
ELSE
IF PR > (TR/100) ** 4 THEN
WP = 1 ( WATER)
ELSE
WP = 0 ( STEAM)
ENDIF
SIG =PR/221.287
TO = (TR+273.15)/647.3
TO2 = TO * TO
TO3 = TO2 * TO
TO4 = TO2 * TO2
TO7 = TO3 * TO4
IF WP=1 THEN ( WATER )
HV=-B0+B1*TO-B2*TO2+B3*TO3+(B5*TO-B6*TO2-B4)*TO4+(B7 +B9*TO2-
B8*TO) *TO7
IF SP_PR = 1 THEN (precision requested)
TO11 = TO7 * TO4
TOM6 = TO**-6

abcd
VV = 6*hh*TOM6-2*gg*TO
U = ff – gg *TO - hh*TOM6
W = U + [kk*U*U + l l(SIG – m*TO)]^0.5
W4T = W**1.33333
E1= Q/W4T[(uu*W-ww*(3.4*U-VV*W+yy*TO-0.72*VV*U]
NTO = nn – TO
NTO2 = NTO * NTO
NTO4 = NTO2 * NTO2
NTO8 = NTO4 * NTO4
E2 = NTO*(L*(nn+TO)+M*NTO8*(nn+9*TO)) -H
ZTO11 = zz+TO11
E3 =N*(zz+12*TO11)/(ZTO11*ZTO11)*(qq + rr/2 +SIG/3)*SIG )
HV = HV + IH*(E1 + (E2 - E3)*SIG)
ENDIF
ELSE ( STEAM )
HV = A0 + A1 * TO + A2 * TO2 +A3 * TO3 + A4 * TO4
TO14 = TO7 * TO7
TO32 = TO14* TO14* TO4
TO282 = TO **2.82
E1 = (3.82 * A / TO282 + 1.32 *E *(CC -SIG / 2) * TO282) * SIG
E2 = DD * SIG - TO3
E3 = ((5*B - 3 * E2 * D * SIG) / TO14 +11 * C / TO32) * SIG3
HV = HV - IH * (E1 + E3)
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF INIT THEN
PIP = TIP = H = 0
ELSE
IF ENO = 0 THEN
( hysteresis ~1 bar and ~1°C)
IF (PI - PIP >= 0.0034 OR PI - PIP <= -0.0034)
OR (TI – TIP >= 0.002 OR TI – TIP >= -0.002) THEN
T = TR*TI
P = PM*PI
IF T > TLIM OR T < TMIN THEN
H=0
ENO = 1
ELSE
IF P > (T/100) ** 4 THEN
WP = 1 ( WATER)
ELSE
WP = 0 ( STEAM)
ENDIF
SIG =P/221.287
TO = (T+273.15)/647.3
TO2 = TO * TO

abcd
TO3 = TO2 * TO
TO4 = TO2 * TO2
TO7 = TO3 * TO4
IF WP=1 THEN ( WATER )
H=-B0+B1*TO-B2*TO2+B3*TO3+(B5*TO-B6*TO2-
B4)*TO4+(B7 +B9*TO2-B8*TO) *TO7
TO11 = TO7 * TO4
TOM6 = TO**-6
V = 6*hh*TOM6-2*gg*TO
U = ff – gg *TO - hh*TOM6
W = U + [kk*U*U + l l(SIG – m*TO)]^0.5
W4T = W**1.33333
E1= Q/W4T[(uu*W-ww*(3.4*U-V*W+yy*TO-0.72*V*U]
NTO = nn – TO
NTO2 = NTO * NTO
NTO4 = NTO2 * NTO2
NTO8 = NTO4 * NTO4
E2 = NTO*(L*(nn+TO)+M*NTO8*(nn+9*TO)) -H
ZTO11 = zz+TO11
E3= N*(zz+12*TO11)/(ZTO11*ZTO11)*(qq + rr/2 +SIG
/3 ) *SIG )
H = H + IH*(E1 + (E2 - E3)*SIG
ENDIF
ELSE ( STEAM )
H = A0 + A1 * TO + A2 * TO2 +A3 * TO3 + A4 * TO4 IF
SP_PR = 1 THEN (precision requested)
TO14 = TO7 * TO7
TO32 = TO14 * TO14 * TO4
TO282 = TO **2.82
E1=(3.82*A/TO282+1.32*E*(CC-SIG/2) *TO282) *SIG
E2 = DD * SIG - TO3
E3 = ((5*B -3*E2*D * SIG ) / TO14 +11*C / TO32) * SIG3
H = H - IH * ( E1 + E3 )
ENDIF
ENDIF
H = H / HV
PIP = PI
TIP = TI
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
Name Description Typ Ne Range Mand. Def. Mand. Advis. First

e g Connectio value Data Param. scan
n value value
Inputs
PI stream pressure in percent D N -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %) AND P <
(T/100)**4
TI stream temperature in percent D N -20000 to+20000 Y Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
AND
100°C<= T < 600°C
SP_PR speed or precision of B Y 0 = speed , 1 = precision of N 1 Y
calculation calculation
Outputs
H Enthalpy in percent D N -20000 to+20000 Y Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
HV Reference enthalpy in KJ/KG D N 0 to 3600 N Y 0
ENO Output Error B Y 1 = Output Error or input out off N - Y 0
range
WP Water Phase B Y 1 = water , 0 = steam N Y
Paramete
rs
TR stream reference temperature D N 100°C<= T < 600°C Y Y

in ° C
PR stream reference pressure in D N PR < (T/100)**4 Y Y
Bars abs
23.4 Use
23.5 SPECIFICATIONS

PIP Last stream pressure in percent D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
TIP Last stream temperature in percent D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
H enthalpy in percent D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
WP Water Phase B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

abcd
ENTALPHY_D().

abcd
Section 24 EQM : MULTIPLE EQUALITY
Specification version : 1.2(01/29/01)
24.1 REPRESENTATION
24.2 FUNCTION
The functionality of this block is as the following:

If IN = ( V1 or V2 or V3 or V4 or V5 ) Then
RE = 1
Else RE = 0
Endif
value value
Inputs
IN Input value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -

Outputs
RE Output B N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
V1 Value 1 W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -
V2 Value 2 W,I,D,L,R N - N Value 1 Y - -

abcd
24.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
This block functional can be used with SEQ block for the input calculation.
24.5 SPECIFICATION
24.5.1 Internal Variable and State variables
None
None, only FB.

abcd
Section 25 EVLOG_20K : EVENT LOG
Specification version : 1.9 (03/06/06). This block is an evolution in storage

capacity of the EVLOG block belonging to “ System Function Block Library “ since July 2002. It has
the same behaviour than EVLOG block but is integrated in P320_MC library .
This block keeps the locked record and configuration, even after a download of
application where the generation of code has been carried out with “Internal Generation” mode
and/or “Generation for on-line modification with redundancy data transfert” mode : the settings
parameters must not be downloaded, without before “Save on line value as initial tuning”, otherwise
records and configuration will be lost and all the EVLOG_20K blocks of the application will be set to
the state “Not Configured”.
25.1 REPRESENTATION
25.2 FONCTION
The event log block stores successive values of selected variables for an off-line display. Variables
are designated by their corresponding registers. The values are stored during a period in which the
event has occurred. The Controset interface will allow bloc configuration, monitoring of the storage,
and data retrieval. This will be made possible by two, internal, buffers which are accessed by the
block and Controset (TAB_CONFIG and TAB_RESULT)
The bloc can also be monitored by either its physical inputs (names wih capital letters) or by
Controset, via the buffers, (names in italic) but not by both at the same time. It is Controset who
decides who's in charge with the cmd_cset bit. Once the settings have been read by the block from
the TAB_CONFIG buffer, as well as from the TAB_RESULT header, and validated by the block,
storing can start by the START input or the start_cset bit of the TAB_RESULT buffer. Unless the
settings are correct, the storing can not go ahead.

abcd
While waiting for a trigger event, the block stores, at every cycle or n cycles according to
configuration (reg_fonct), the values of selected variables, each in its reserved buffer space.
However, not all the space is used before the trigger event but only part of it (pre-trigger) while the
rest of the space will be filled up by the values of the variable after the event. The part of the space
used before the event is specified by the parameter seg_cset (storage space before trigger =
1/seg_cset of the whole space destined for one variable) of the TAB_RESULT buffer. The trigger
can be forced by the TRIG_ON input or by the trig_on_cset bit. Storing, before or after trigger, can
be stopped by the CANCEL input or cancel_cset bit.

abcd
T-t1 T+t2
T : Trigger instant
Trigger position is fixed by the seg_cset

While waiting for a trigger, non stop register (default value is ½) .
circular memorisation is performed When trigger occurs, recording is performed
on the pre-trigger segment every n every n cycles on the second part of the
cycles (1<= n <=256). This way, segment until it is full. This allows recording
values from T-t1 till T are recorded of values from T to T+ t2 instants.
The block recordes the value of each variable at every n cycles of its execution. Therefore the time
aspect can be found out by, simply, knowing the cycle time of the diagram and the value n.
The output MEM indicates the state of the block :
MEM = 0 -> block not configured at all or not well configured

MEM = 1 -> block configured and waiting for a START or start_cset
MEM = 2 -> recording on the first segment and waiting for trigger to fill up the second segment
MEM = 3 -> recording on the second segment is in progress after trigger
MEM = 4 -> recording finished and block is in locked state until values recorded have been
downloaded.
The output FAULT_1 indicates which equation set the trigger first : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 respectively no
fault, 1st trigger, 2nd trigger, 3rd trigger, TRIG_ON or trig_on_cset
A segment of registers for storing data is assigned to each selected 16 bits analogue variable, a
double segment for each 32 bits analogue variable and one segment for all logic variables. The size
of the segment depends on the number of variables to record, their type (size), as well as the
storage space.
Configuration of the event log block :
The header of the configuration table TAB_CONFIG contains the trigger equations settings. Each of
the three equations comprises a comparison variables (CLASSE_REGx, TYPE_REGx,
RANG_REGx, BIT_OFFSET), the operator (OPx) and a threashold (SEUILx) .
It contains for each variable, its class (%I, %R or %M…), its type (logical, integer, word, double, float
or unsigned long), its rank and its offset bit (only for logic variable in %R class).
The maximum number of stored variables is 16 logic and 9 analogue, 25 in all. The memory space
allocated to each variable, and therefore the time of memorisation, is calculated according to the
number of analogue variables to memorise and their type (16 or 32 bits). A number of logic variables
of 0 or 16 use the same memory space. The block can memorise two types of analogue variables :
16 or 32 bits analogue variables.

abcd
The triggers diagram is as follows:

Any equation not set or wrongly set is considered to be true.
4 operators are allowed : OPx = “0” corresponds to “=”

OPx = “1” corresponds to “≥”
OPx = “2” corresponds to “≤”
OPx = “3” corresponds to “≠”
OPx = “4” corresponds to rising edge (for logic variables only)
Opx = “5” corresponds to falling edge (for logic variables only)
TRIG1 OP1 SEUIL1

≥1
TRIG2 OP2 SEUIL2 &
TRIG3 OP3 SEUIL3 ≥1
TRIG_ON
Notes :
- More than one EVLOG blocks can be put into the same diagram.
- <= and >= operators should not be used with logic variables otherwise, the equation is considered
to be true.
- Operators 4 and 5 should not be used with numeric variables otherwise, the equation is considered
to be true.
Configuration table structure (TAB_CONFIG):

TAB_CONFIG contains 122 elements, the first register indicates the number of variables to
memorise, 21 registers for the trigger parameters and 100 registers for the parameters of the 25
variables to memorise (16 logical + 9 analogue). Apart from the threashold registers, which are
expressed on 32 bits words, the other elements are 16 bit words
1st part :
Trigger parameters:
NBR_VARIABLE CLASSE_REG1 TYPE_REG1 RANG_REG1 BIT_OFFSET1 OP1 SEUIL1 CLASSE_REG2 TYPE_REG2
RANG_REG2 BIT_OFFSET2 OP2 SEUIL2 CLASSE_REG3 TYPE_REG3 RANG_REG3 BIT_OFFSET3 OP3
SEUIL3
2nd part :
Settings for variables to memorise:
CLASSE_REG1 TYPE_REG1 RANG_REG1 BIT_OFFSET1 … CLASSE_REG24 TYPE_REG24 RANG_REG24 BIT_OFFSET24
NBR_VARIABLE : contains the total number of variables to memorise.

abcd
CLASSE_REGx : indicates the class register of the variable x to memorise ( “1“ %I, “2“ %R, "3"
%AI, "4" %M, "5" %Q et "6" %AQ).
RANG_REGx : indicates the register row.
TYPE_REGx : indicates the type of variable to memorise ( “1“ type logical, “2“ type integer, “3“ type
word, “4“ type double, “5“ type float, “6” type unsigned long).
BIT_OFFSETx : indicates the offset in the specified register for the logic %R class variables starting
at 1 (1 indicates the first bit)
Variables must be put in the configuration table in the following order: logic, analogue 16 bits and
analogue 32 bits.
Trigger comparison values must be of the same type as that of the variables against which they will
be compared. The types supported are : INTEGER, WORD, LONG, REAL, DOUBLE
A configuration is considered valid if the number specified in the first register of TAB_CONFIG is
less than or equal to the number of configured variables.
Result table structure:
The result table (TAB_RESULT) contains a header and 500 registers that will be filled up by part of
the data recorded in the bloc’s memory. The block’s memory is much larger than TAB_RESULT.
When memorisation is finished, the bloc checks the register reg_fonct to see which segement of
data is wanted then copies it from bloc’s memory to TAB_RESULT.
The bloc memory is of this form :
Control LOGICAL ANALOGUE ANALOGUE ANALOGUE

nbr_pert, pos0, pos_trigger, L0,…,L16 A1 … An
nbr_reg, reg_fonct, seg_cset
0 T 0 T 0 T 0 T
T = Trigger position (fixed by seg_cset register)
0 = trigger event position (between the beginning of the segment and T), this position is specified in
pos0 register in the header.
The result table header contains 12 (16 bits) registers:
nbr_pert : specifies the number of registers in this table.

pos0 : specifies the index at which trigger occured ( ≤ (T-1) ).
pos_trigger : contains the position at which memorisation will continue after trigger occurs(T).
nbr_reg : contains the number of registers for each 16 bits variable.
reg_fonct : working register which contains control bits :
- Low byte :
- bit0 : indicates if the block is locked after filling up its memory
- the rest of the bits are not used currently
- High byte :
- At configuration and while memorising, this byte should be set to the number
n of points to ommit (1 out of n points will be recorded). (1<=n<=256)
Ex : if n = 5, 1 point out of five will be recorded

abcd
When the block has finished memorising and is locked, this byte should be set to
-
the segment number of the results wanted.
Ex : if the total memory of the bloc is 12000 words then to get all the memorised
points the user needs to set the high byte to 1 for the first segment, then 2 for
the second…and 24 for the last
year_reg : stores the year for the trigger date
month_reg : stores the month for the trigger date when it occurs
day_reg : stores the day for the trigger date when it occurs
hour_reg : stores the hour for the trigger date when it occurs
min_reg : stores the minute for the trigger date when it occurs
sec_reg : stores the second for the trigger date when it occurs
seg_cset : This register is used for two purposes.
- The low order byte is used to store the number on which the length of the
segment is divided to find the length of the pre-trigger. Ex : 8 means the length of
memorising zone before trigger is 1/8th of the length of the segment intended for
the variable.
- The high order byte is used by Controset in order to control the bloc :
- bit8 : start_cset : Start recording
- bit9 : trig_on_cset : Controset manual trigger
- bit10: cancel_cset : Controset cancel recording
- bit11: cmd_cset : who controles Controset (1) or the block (0)
- bit12: restart_cset : Restart recording
The rest of the space is to be shared between the variables to be memorised according to the
formula bellow:
Bloc _ buffer _ size

Number of registers =
(1 + number _ of _ 16bits _ var iables ) + (2 * number _ of _ 32bits _ var iables
Here are few examples for a block with 12000 words memory
Number of logic Number of 16 bits Number of 32 bits Number of registers

variables variables variables
0 1 0 6000
0 1 1 3000
1 1 1 3000
7 1 1 3000
16 1 1 3000
16 2 2 1714
16 4 4 923
16 9 0 1200
16 0 9 631
Global working graph:

abcd
Waiting for
BLOCK
configuration
UNLOCKED
MEM=0
CONFIG
OK
Waiting for
start MEM=1
STAR
Circular
Recording
Before trigger
MEM=2
TRIG_ON TRIGGE
Recording after
RESTART trigger CANCEL
MEM=3
END OF
MEMORISATIO
End of
Recording
block locked
MEM=4

abcd
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. value Mand Advised First
Connection . parameters scan
Data value value
Inputs - - - - - - - - -
START Start memorisation B N - N 0 Y - -

CANCEL Cancel memorisation B N - N 0 Y - -
TRIG_ON Command ON manually B N - N 0 Y - -
RESTART Restart memorisation B N - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
MEM State of memorisation W N [0-4] Y Y - -
FAULT_1 First Fault W N [0-5] Y Y 0
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
SMALL_SIZE Small size choice (3000 B N - N Not N - -

Words) connected
(20000
Words)
5000_SIZE 5000 size selected B N - N Not N - -
between the two small connected
sizes (5000 or 3000) (3000
Words)
25.4 USE :
Small_size to choice the minimal size of the block (3000 Words for the internal array
TAB_RESULT[]) ;
5000_size to choice between the two small sizes (5000 or 3000), the medium size for the
internal array TAB_RESULT[] ;
Without any value on SMALL_SIZE or 5000_SIZE, the block will be intialized like the
previous version of the EVLOG, with 20 000 Words for the internal array TAB_RESULT[] ;
• Scheme :
None
None
25.5 SPECIFICATION :

abcd
TAB_CONFIG, COM : Configuration table, TYPE : WORD, LENGTH=122

TAB_RESULT_EXT, COM : External result table, TYPE : WORD, LENGTH=512
STA_MEMO_CONF1, COM : Saves configuration, TYPE : WORD, LENGTH=116
STA_MEMO_CONF2, COM : Saves threasholds, TYPE : REAL, LENGTH=3
STA_COUNT_REG, COM : Register index TYPE : WORD
STA_COUNT_LOG, COM : Logic variable counter, TYPE : WORD
STA_COUNT_ANAL16, COM : 16 bits analogue variables counter, TYPE : WORD
STA_COUNT_ANAL32, COM : 32 bits analogue variables counter, TYPE : WORD
STA_TRIGGER, COM : Trigger state, TYPE : WORD
STA_NBR_REG, COM : Number of registers for a channel, TYPE : WORD
STA_NBR_LOG, COM : Number of logic variables, TYPE : WORD
STA_NBR_ANAL16, COM : Number of 16 bits analogue variables, TYPE : WORD
STA_NBR_ANAL32, COM : Number of 32 bits analogue variables, TYPE : WORD
STA_SEG_CSET, COM : Segment divider for pre-trigger, TYPE : WORD
STA_TRIG1, COM : Previous state of boolean value of 1st equation for edge detection, TYPE :
BOOLEAN
STA_TRIG2, COM : Previous state of boolean value of 2nd equation for edge detection, TYPE :
BOOLEAN
STA_TRIG3, COM : Previous state of boolean value of 3rd equation for edge detection, TYPE :
BOOLEAN
STA_COND1, COM : previous state of 1st equation, to find out who triggered, TYPE : BOOLEAN
STA_COND1, COM : previous state of 2nd equation, to find out who triggered, TYPE : BOOLEAN
STA_TMP_FAULT_1, COM : Previous value of FAULT_1, TYPE : WORD
STA_N_FOIS, COM : Previous value of number of times before recording a point, TYPE : WORD
None
EVLOG_20K(), EVLOG_5000(), EVLOG_3000().

abcd
Section 26 FI_(D,R) : FOLLOW-UP INTEGRATOR FUNCTION
FI_D (old name : ANTIBUMP_D) Specification version : 1.6 (10/31/00)

FI_R (old name : ANTIBUMP_R) Specification version : 1.6 (10/31/00)
26.2 Function
This function limits the value evolution to avoid bump (Function with 2 ramps, and init. order)
SLD : negative slope
SLU : positive slope
IC : In it C om m an d
IV
IV α β
RE
β
IN
IN α
Inputs :
IN : Analogue input,
SLD : Analogue input for negative slope value (%/s),

abcd
SLU : Analogue input for positive slope value (%/s),

IV : Analogue value for initialisation,
IC : Logic input requesting initialization of output,
Outputs :
RE : Analogue output of bumpless function (result).
Parameterization :
TY : Logic choice for SLU & SLD scale
If IC (K) = 1 Then RE (K) = IV (K)

Else If IN (K) - RE (K-1) > SLU(K) (in relation with Te)
Then RE (K) = RE (K-1)+SLU(K).(with TY scale)
Else If IN (K) - RE (K-1) < -SLD(K) (in relation with Te)
Then RE (K) = RE (K-1)-SLD(K).(with TY scale).
Else RE (K) = IN (K)
value value
Inputs
IN input D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y -
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
SLU Increasing rate D/R N 0 to+32767 for 0 to 327.67 Y - Y -
%/s or %/min (see TY)
SLD Decreasing rate D/R N 0 to+32767 for 0 to 327.67 Y - Y -
%/s or %/min (see TY)
IV Initialization value D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y -
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IC Initialization Command BOOL Y 1= Initialization N 0 Y -
Outputs
RE Result D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y - 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Parameters
LO © Minimum value for RE D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N -20000 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
HI © Maximum value for RE D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N 20000 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
TY © SLU & SLD scale in B N 0-> %/s N 0 Y
%/min 1-> %/min

abcd
26.4 Use
26.5 SPECIFICATIONS

REP1000 RE(K-1)*1000 D 0 R
• 3 booleans and 6 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable) for FI_D().
• 3 booleans and 5 reals (amongst which 1 state variable) for FI_R().
FI_D() and FI_R().

abcd
Section 27 FOX*_(D,DI,R) : FUNCTION GENERATOR
FOX1_D,FOX2_D,FOX3_D,FOX4_D Specification version : 1.4 (04/11/01)

FOX1_R,FOX2_R,FOX3_R,FOX4_R Specification version : 1.4 (04/11/01)
FOX1_DI, FOX2_DI, FOX3_DI,FOX4_DI, Specification version : 1.0 (04/13/04)
27.1 REPRESENTATION
Y-axis

X-axis
abcd
27.2 FUNCTION
This function block calculates the value of output RE based on the standardized input IN.
This function, F(IN), is defined by maximum of 32 x-axis ( always rising ) points
corresponding to y-axis points. The curve between these points is linear
If NB > nb value of X or Y then the missing value of X or Y are equal to the last value of X
or Y.
If NB < nb value of X or Y then the last couple of X(NB-1;NB) or Y(NB-1;NB) are taking
account to the calcul of the output RE.
If input IN < at the first value of X then the output RE follows the slope of the first couple of
point (X;X+1).
If input IN > at the last value of X then the output RE follows the slope of the last couple of
point (Xn-1;Xn).
value value
Inputs
IN Input D,R N - Y - Y - -
Outputs
RE Result D,R N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
NB Number of couple W N { 2 to 32 } Y - Y - 2
limited
X Value of X with D,I,R N - Y - Y - -
minimum of 2
values and
maximum 32
values
Y Value of Y with D,I,R N - Y - Y - -
minimum of 2
values and
maximum 32
values

abcd
27.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None
27.5 SPECIFICATION
• 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state
variable) for FOX1_D, FOX2_D, FOX3_D, FOX4_D ;
variable) for FOX1_DI, FOX2_DI, FOX3_DI, FOX4_DI ;
variable) for FOX1_R, FOX2_R, FOX3_R, FOX4_R ;
None
FOX1_D(), FOX2_D(), FOX3_D(), FOX4_D() and

FOX1_DI(), FOX2_DI(), FOX3_DI(), FOX4_DI() and
FOX1_R(), FOX2_R(), FOX3_R(), FOX4_R().

abcd
Section 28 FTF_1L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - FIRST LEVEL
FTF_1L Specification version : 1.0 (08/28/01)
28.2 Function
This function is used to detect the first of 100 tripping defaults.
Inputs :
TAB : Array of 100 Boolean corresponding to 100 Boolean information.
RESET : Reset RE on pulse.
Outputs :
RE : [1;100] Number of the first Boolean information of the Boolean array set
since the last RESET or initialisation cycle. (If more than one Boolean are set
simultaneously, RE takes the minimum value.)
If TAB[i]=0 and RESET=1, RE is reset.

RE=0 until at least one of the 100 Boolean is set.
IF INIT
RE = 0
ELSE
IF RESET
RE = 0
IF RE = 0
FOR RE=0 to (RE=99 AND TAB[ RE] = 0)
ENDFOR
RE = RE+1
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
Connection value Data parameter scan
s value value
Inputs -
TAB Table (100 TBOO N TAB[i] = 1 : Boolean Y - Y
bits information n° i+1
elements in
%M Boolean
memory)
RESET Reset order BOO N 1 = reset order Y - Y -
Outputs
RE Number of I N 0 = No default Y - Y 0
the first [0;100]
Boolean
information
28.4 Use
28.5 SPECIFICATIONS

VRE I [0;100] 0 R
Internal variables : 1 integer (amongst which 1 state variable).
FTF_1L().

abcd
Section 29 FTF_2L : FIRST TRIPPING FAULT - SECOND LEVEL
FTF_2L Specification version : 1.0 (09/26/01)
29.2 Function
This function is used to detect the tripping default of three channels(with memorisation of the
first tripping default).
For detecting the tripping fault of two channels assign a constant on:
F3_NOK=1 and NB3=100
Inputs :
NBx (x={1;2;3}) : Number of the first tripping default on channel x.
Range {0;1;2;…;100} expect the value of NB_FX chosen by the
user
Fx_NOK(x={1;2;3}) : Boolean information indicating, when reset, a communication failure

with the channel x .
NB_FX Constant associated to a communication failure (Fx_NOK) of

each of the 3 Channels.
Outputs :
RE : [1;100] Number of the second tripping fault appearing since the last
RESET or initialisation cycle
IF INIT /*
RE=0 /*
VRE1=0 /*Initialisation (first cycle)
VDF1=0 /*

abcd
ELSE
IF RESET
RE=0 /*
VRE1=0 /*The memorised variables are
VDF1=0 /* reset
ENDIF
IF (RE==0)
IF ((/Fi_NOK)&&(NBi!=0)) /*For i={1;2;3}
NBi_BIS=MIN(NBFX;NBi) /*
ELSE /*
NBi_BIS = NBi
ENDIF
/*
IF (VDF1!=0) /* For i={1;2;3}
IF (VDF1=i AND VRE1=NBi_BIS) /* This part of program
VDF1=i /* detects a first default
ELSE /* on channel 1
VDF1=0 /* or channel 2
ENDIF /* or channel 3
SWITCH (VDF1)
CASE i: /*for i={1;2;3}
IF((NB(i+1)_BIS!=0) OR (NB(i+2)_BIS!=0)) /*
IF(VRE1=NB(i+1)_BIS) /*
RE=NB(i+1)_BIS /*
ELSEIF(VRE1=NB(i+2)_BIS) /* In this case the
RE= NB3_BIS /*fault on channel 1
ELSE /*is considered as a
RE=MIN(NB2_BIS;NB3_BIS)/*first tripping fault
ENDIF /*
ELSE /*
RE=0 /*
ENDIF
BREAK
ENDSWITCH
ENDIF
IF (VDF==0)
RE=MIN(NB1_BIS, NB2_BIS, NB3_BIS)
IF((NB1_BIS!=0) XOR (NB2_BIS!=0) XOR (NB3_BIS!=0))

RE=0
IF(NB1_BIS!=0) /*This part set
VDF1=1 /*the state variables
VRE1=NB1_BIS /*(VDF1 and VRE1)
IF(NB2_BIS!=0) /*in order to define
VDF1=2 /*a first tripping default
VRE1=NB2_BIS /*at the next cycle.

abcd
IF(NB3_BIS!=0)
VDF1=3
VRE1=NB3_BIS
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
Example of sequences describing the function of the bloc:

NB_FX = 62
CYCLE NB1 NB2 NB3 F1_NOK F2_NOK F3_NOK RESET RE Observation

INIT x x X x x x x 0 First cycle
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No default
2 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 First default (N°54) on ch1
3 54 0 63 0 0 0 0 63 Second default (N°63) on ch3
4 x x x x x x 0 63 Memorisation of RE till the next
RESET
5 0 74 0 0 0 0 1 0 RESET(pulse) and first default
(N°74) simultaneously
6 0 74 0 0 0 0 0 0 Memorisation of the last RESET
(RE=0) till the next second default.
7 0 74 0 0 1 0 0 0 Other Default (Communication
failure N°62) on the same channel
as the first default : not considered
as a second default
8 0 74 0 0 1 1 0 62 Second default (Communication
failure (N°62)) on channel 3
9 x x x x x x 0 62 Memorisation of RE till the next
RESET
10 45 24 0 0 0 0 1 24 RESET and default N°45 on ch1
and default N°24 on ch2: the
RESET is not taken in account and
RE is refreshed with the lowest of
the 2 defaults
11 85 63 0 0 0 1 1 62 N°45 on ch1 and N°63 on ch2 and
N°62 on ch3 (communication
default): RE takes the lowest value
of the 3 defaults
12 22 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 2 defaults on the same channel and
RESET : RE is reset
13 64 87 0 0 1 0 0 62 N°64 on ch1 and [(N°87 and N°62)
=>priority for N°62 (the lowest one)]
on ch2 : RE takes the lowest value
14 85 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 N°85 on ch1(first default) and
RESET : RE is reset
15 85 0 85 0 1 0 x 85 Appearance of N°62 on ch2 and
N°85 on ch3: RE takes the most
frequent value in priority on the
lowest value.

abcd
Connection value Data parameter scan
s value value
Inputs -
NB1 Number of I N [0;100] Y Y
the first
tripping
default on
channel 1
NB2 Number of N [0;100] Y Y
the first
tripping
default on
channel 2
NB3 Number of I N [0;100] N 100 Y
the first
tripping
default on
channel 3
F1_NOK Communicat° BOO Y 0 = Communication Y Y
failure ch1 failure
F2_NOK Communicat° BOO Y 0 = Communication Y Y
failure ch2 failure
F3_NOK Communicat° BOO Y 0 = Communication N 0 Y
failure ch3 failure
RESET Reset on BOO Y 1 = reset order Y Y
pulse
Paramters
NB_FX Number of I N [0;100] Y Y
the
communicat°
fault
Outputs
RE Number of I N 0 = No default Y - Y 0
the first [0;100]
Boolean
information
29.4 Use
29.5 SPECIFICATIONS

VDF1 Channel of the first tripping default I [1;2;3] 0 R
VRE RE[k-1] state variable I [0;100] 0 R

abcd
VRE1 Number of the first tripping default I [0;100] 0 R
Internal variables : 4 booleans and 4 integers (amongst which 3 state variables).
FTF_2L().

abcd
Section 30 GAI(_D,N_R) : ADJUSTABLE GAIN
GAI_D Specification version : 1.4 (09/29/05)

GAIN_R Specification version : 1.4 (09/29/05)
30.2 Function
This block applies a gain to the sum of its inputs by [Gain_Value GN].
• INITIALIZATION : the block output RE is positioned in accordance with the normal
operation.
• NORMAL OPERATION : The block multiply the inputs summation by [Gain_Value GN],
(RE = ( ∑ INn ) * GN).
• The Gain value is defined as following :
Type D then 100 = Gain of 1.
Type R then 100 = Gain of 100, for GAIN_R.
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input 1 Y - N - -
IN2
…
Input 2
Input …
Integer,Double Y
for _D, Real for
]− ∞;+∞[ N
…
0
0
N
…
IN8 Input 8 N_R. N 0 N

abcd
Outputs
RE Output or
Result
Integer,Double N
for _D, Real for
]− ∞;+∞[ Y Y - -
N_R.
Parameters
Integer,Double
GN Gain value for _D, Real for Y
N_R.
]− ∞;+∞[ Y N - -
This block can be real or double integer.

IN1 to 8, RE & GN are the same type for each type of block.
30.4 Use
• not applicable.
IN1 to 8 : INPUT : Integer, Double for GAI_D or Real for GAIN_R input,
IN1 mandatory.
RE : OUTPUT : Integer, Double for GAI_D or Real for GAIN_R
output, mandatory.
GN : GAIN VALUE : Integer, Double for GAI_D or Real for GAIN_R
input.
GN is a User parameter. This block is not an historical block.
Associated FGT :
Scheme
INP
1 to n
Σ
A*B RE
GN

abcd
Internal variables : 9 doubles for GAI_D or 9 reals for GAIN_R.
LEA.
None.

abcd
Section 31 GROUP : FUNCTION GROUP
31.1 REPRESENTATION
31.2 FUNCTION
This function block shall be applied as control block for a group of subornated function blocks,
in order to establish a clearly structured hierarchy of the control system. Such a group can
either be switched ON or OFF manually from the operator’s HMI or automatically from super-
imposed sequencer. The function group will forward the ON order to all subordinated systems
and will also supervise the execution of the command. The OFF order will be processed
accordingly. A STOP command however, will reset all output orders from the function group
block and also omit supervision of the subordinated systems. This way manual operation of
those systems is possible without interference through automatic orders from group level.
Use of inputs/outputs and parameters.
• INITIALIZATION
The output [STAT_STP] is set in accordance with the [INIT_STOP] parameter.
The output [OFF] is set in accordance with the [INIT_OFF] parameter if [INIT_STOP] = 0 else
[OFF] = 0.
The output [ON] is set in accordance with the [INIT_ON] parameter if [INIT_STOP] = 0 and
[INIT_OFF] = 0 else [ON] = 0.
• OPERATION MODE

abcd
The inputs [ON_MANU] and [OFF_MANU] are activated from operator HMI and [ON_AUTO]
and [OFF_AUTO] are activated by superimposed sequencer. They can only becoms active if
the corresponding release input [ON_REL], [OFF_REL] ( initial condition ) is set to 1. The
[OFF] command is dominant. They activate the corresponding outputs [ON] and [OFF].
When the input [STOP] is activated then the output following are reseted [ON], [OFF],
[STAT_ON], [STAT_OFF] and the status signal [STAT_STP] is true. After taking away the
[STOP] request, the function group can be reactivated after receiving another of
[ON/OFF_MANU] or [ON/OFF_AUTO] then the status signal [STAT_STP] becomes false.
The inputs [FBK_ON] and [FBK_OFF] are the feedback from the process, the function group
supervises this inputs after the orders [ON] or [OFF]. The time [TIME_FBK] is initiated by the
orders [ON] or [OFF], at the end of this time, if the corresponding feedback is not present then
the disturbed signal [STAT_DIS] is set.
When the order [ON] or [OFF] is seted and the corresponding feedback is true then the
corresponding status signal [STAT_ON] or [STAT_OFF] is seted.
value value
Inputs
ON_MANU Manual ON B N - N 0 Y - -
command
ON_AUTO Automatic ON B N - N 0 Y - -
command
ON_REL Release for ON B Y - N 1 Y - -
command
OFF_MANU Manual OFF B N - N 0 Y - -
command
OFF_AUTO Automatic OFF B N - N 0 Y - -
command
OFF_REL Release for OFF B Y - N 1 Y - -
command
STOP Stop command B Y - N 0 Y - -
FBK_ON Feedback ON B Y - Y - Y - -
FBK_OFF Feedback OFF B Y - Y - Y - -
Outputs
ON ON order B N - Y - Y - -
OFF OFF order B N - Y - Y - -
STAT_ON Status ON B N - Y - Y - -
STAT_OFF Status OFF B N - Y - Y - -
STAT_DIS Status disturbed B N - Y - Y - -
STAT_STP Status stopped B N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -

abcd
TIME_FBK Time waiting D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
feedback 100 = 1 s
INIT_STOP Init value of STOP B N - N * N - -
status
INIT_ON Init value of ON B N - N * Y - -
status
INIT_OFF Init value of OFF B N - N * Y - -
status
* IF [INIT_STOP] and [INIT_ON] and [INIT_OFF] are not connected then defaut value of
[INIT_STOP] equal to 1 else [INIT_STOP] equal to 0.
31.4 USE :
INIT_STOP , INIT_ON , INIT_OFF
• Scheme :
FBK_ON
INIT_ON & STAT_ON
ON_MANU S
≥1 & R
ON_AUTO ON
R S
ON_REL ≥1 NOT &
NOT TON
INIT_STOP TIME_FBK
S
STOP
R
R STAT_STP
S
NOT
& TIME_FBK
≥1
INIT_OFF TON & ≥1 STAT_DIS
OFF_MANU S
≥1 & R NOT
OFF_AUTO OFF
R S
OFF_REL ≥1
FBK_OFF & STAT_OFF

abcd
31.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 11 booleans (amongst which 5 state variables) and 3 doubles

(amongst which 3 state variables).
None
GROUP().

abcd
Section 32 GRP : FUNCTION GROUP ( WITH OR WITHOUT TIME

MONITORING )
32.1 REPRESENTATION
32.2 FUNCTION
This function block shall be applied as control block for a group of subornated function blocks,
in order to establish a clearly structured hierarchy of the control system. Such a group can
either be switched ON or OFF manually from the operator’s HMI or automatically from super-
imposed sequencer. The function group will forward the ON order to all subordinated systems
and will also supervise the execution of the command. The OFF order will be processed
accordingly. A STOP command however, will reset all output orders from the function group
block and also omit supervision of the subordinated systems. This way manual operation of
those systems is possible without interference through automatic orders from group level.
Use of inputs/outputs and parameters.
• INITIALIZATION
The output [STP_ST] is set at 1 if [INIT_OFF] and [INIT_ON] are set to 0.
The output [OFF] is set in accordance with the [INIT_OFF] .
The output [ON] is set in accordance with the [INIT_ON] parameter if [INIT_OFF] = 0 else
[ON] = 0.
• OPERATION MODE

abcd
The inputs [ON_MANU] and [OFF_MANU] are activated from operator HMI and [ON_AUTO]
and [OFF_AUTO] are activated by superimposed sequencer. They can only becoms active if
the corresponding release input [ON_REL], [OFF_REL] ( initial condition ) is set to 1. The
[OFF] command is dominant. They activate the corresponding outputs [ON] and [OFF].
When the input [STOP] is activated then the output following are reseted [ON], [OFF],
[ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and the status signal [STP_ST] is true. After taking away the [STOP]
request, the function group can be reactivated after receiving another of [ON/OFF_MANU] or
[ON/OFF_AUTO] then the status signal [STP_ST] becomes false.
The inputs [FBK_ON] and [FBK_OFF] are the feedback from the process, the function group
supervises this inputs after the orders [ON] or [OFF].
If [ON_T] is null, then there is no time monitoring control then the state disturb appear if the
orders [ON] is set and the feedback [FBK_ON] is lost or the orders [OFF] is set and the
feedback [FBK_OFF] is lost.
If [ON_T] is not null, the time [ON_T] is initiated by the orders [ON] or [OFF], at the end of
this time, if the corresponding feedback is not present then the disturbed signal [DIS_ST] is
set.
When the order [ON] or [OFF] is seted and the corresponding feedback is true then the
corresponding status signal [ON_ST] or [OFF_ST] is seted.
value value
Inputs
ON_MANU Manual ON B N - N 0 Y - -
command
ON_AUTO Automatic ON B N - N 0 Y - -
command
ON_REL Release for ON B Y - N 1 Y - -
command
OFF_MANU Manual OFF B N - N 0 Y - -
command
OFF_AUTO Automatic OFF B N - N 0 Y - -
command
OFF_REL Release for OFF B Y - N 1 Y - -
command
STOP Stop command B Y - N 0 Y - -
FBK_ON Feedback ON B Y - Y - Y - -
FBK_OFF Feedback OFF B Y - Y - Y - -
Outputs
ON ON order B N - Y - Y - -
OFF OFF order B N - Y - Y - -
ON_ST Status ON B N - Y - Y - -

abcd
OFF_ST Status OFF B N - Y - Y - -
DIS_ST Status disturbed B N - Y - Y - -
STP_ST Status stopped B N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
ON_T Time waiting D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
feedback ON 100 = 1 s
OFF_T Time waiting D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
feedback OFF 100 = 1 s
INIT_ON Init value of ON B N - N * Y - -
status
INIT_OFF Init value of OFF B N - N * Y - -
status
* At initialisation if [INIT_ON] and [INIT_OFF] are not connected then defaut value is
[STAT_STOP] equal to 1 else [STAT_STOP] equal to 0.
32.4 USE :
INIT_ON , INIT_OFF
• Scheme :
&
&
≥1
FBK_ON
INIT_ON
& ON_ST
ON_MANU S
≥1
ON_T = 0
ON_AUTO & R
ON
S
ON_REL ≥1 R & ≥1
NOT TON
ON_T
STOP
& STP_ST
OFF_T
TON ≥1 DIS_ST
&
OFF_MANU
INIT_OFF
≥1
S
≥1 & R
OFF_AUTO OFF
S
OFF_REL ≥1 R OFF_T = 0
FBK_OFF &
authority is strictly forbidden OFF_ST
CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library ≥1 PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

USER'S MANUAL & 137/420
&
abcd

abcd
Associated FGT :
32.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 13 booleans (amongst which 6 state variables) and 2 doubles

None
GRP().

abcd
Section 33 IMPMC / IMPMCW : PULSE ON EDGE
IMPMC_D, IMPMCW_D Specification version : 1.0 (04/12/01)
33.1 representation
33.2 Function
The Functional Block IMPMC carries out a retriggerable pulse, and controls two booleans
outputs REU and RED.
When the input IN has a rising edge a pulse is generated on the output REU, when the input
IN has a falling edge a pulse is generated on the output RED.
In both cases, the duration of the pulse is the value of the parameter TP depending to the
cycle time.
The pulse is retriggerable. Then, if a new edge of the same type appears before the end of
time period, the duration of the pulse is extended by TP.
IN
REU TP TP
RED
TP TP
Time diagram

abcd
connec value Data paramet scan
tion ers value value
Inputs
IN Pulse Input B Y Y - -
Outputs
REU Output I+ B Y Y - 0
RED Output I- B Y Y - 0
Parameters N * Cycle
TP
Duration in hundredths of a
second D ]0;+∞[ Y Y
time
-
33.4 USE :
Description of terminals
IN : PULSE INPUT boolean input compulsory. The function block IMP reacts to
the rising and falling edge of IN.
REU : OUTPUT 1 : I +
If there is a rising edge on IN, the Function Block IMP generates a pulse of
duration TP on REU. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge
occuring before the end of the times period.
RED : OUTPUT 2 : I –
If there is a falling edge on IN, the function block IMP generates a pulse of
duration TP on RED. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge
occuring before the en of the times period.
TP : DURATION
Duration of pulse in 0.01 second.
D type integer : maximum value + 2,147 * 109
If TP is less than or equal to cycle time, it is considered to be 0 ; no pulse.
The output RED and REU are calculated in function of cycle time.
Example : If TP = 190 (1.9 sec.) and IF Tcyc = 0,5 sec, the duration of the
pulses is on (1.7 / 0.5 = 3 « integer ») 3 cycles therefore ( 3 * 0. 5 = 1.5)
1.5 seconds.
Changes to TP during a pulse are not taken into account. Its taking
account at the next pulse.
Notes :
• During initialization cycles, at the controller start up :

REU = RED = 0, no pulse

abcd
• In operating mode (INIT ≠ 0)
− if IN(K) = IN(K-1), the pulse is not started
− if IN(K) ≠ IN(K-1), a pulse is started on REU or RED depending on the state

change : 0->1 or 1->0 of IN.
Scheme :NONE
33.5 SPECIFICATION
• 4 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 2 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables)
for IMPMC_D,
• 4 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 2 words (amongst which 2 state variables)
for IMPMCW_D.
IMPMC_D() and IMPMCW_D().

abcd
Section 34 IMPMCDWN : PULSE ON FALLING EDGE
IMPMCDWN_W Specification version : 1.0 (07/17/01)
34.1 representation
34.2 Function
The Functional Block IMPMCDWN carries out a retriggerable pulse, and controls one boolean
outputs RED.
When the input IN has a falling edge a pulse is generated on the output RED.
The duration of the pulse is the value of the parameter TP depending to the cycle time.
IN
RED
TP TP
Time diagram
Inputs
Outputs
RED Output I- B Y Y - 0
Duration in hundredths of a time

abcd
TP second W
]0;+∞[ Y Y -

abcd
34.4 USE :
RED : OUTPUT 2 : I –
If there is a falling edge on IN, the function block IMP generates a pulse of
duration TP on RED. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge
occuring before the en of the times period.
TP : DURATION
The output RED is calculated in function of cycle time.
1.5 seconds.
Notes :

RED = 0, no pulse
− if IN(K) ≠ IN(K-1), a pulse is started on RED depending on the state change : 1-

>0 of IN.
Scheme :NONE

abcd
34.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state
variable).
IMPMCDWN_W().

abcd
Section 35 IMPMCUP : PULSE ON RISING EDGE
IMPMCUP_W Specification version : 1.0 (07/17/01)
35.1 representation
35.2 Function
The Functional Block IMPMCUP carries out a retriggerable pulse, and controls one boolean
outputs REU.
When the input IN has a rising edge a pulse is generated on the output REU.
The duration of the pulse is the value of the parameter TP depending on the cycle time.
IN
REU TP TP
Time diagram
Inputs
Outputs
REU Output I+ B Y Y - 0
Duration in hundredths of a time

abcd
TP second W
]0;+∞[ Y Y -

abcd
35.4 USE :
REU : OUTPUT 1 : I +
If there is a rising edge on IN, the Function Block IMP generates a pulse of
duration TP on REU. This pulse is retriggerable by a new rising edge
occuring before the end of the times period.
TP : DURATION
The output REU is calculated in function of cycle time.
1.5 seconds.
Notes :

REU = 0, no pulse
− if IN(K) ≠ IN(K-1), a pulse is started on REU depending on the state change : 0-

>1 or of IN.
Scheme :NONE

abcd
35.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 word (amongst which 1 state
variable).
IMPMCUP_W().

abcd
Section 36 IT_(D,R) : INTEGRATOR
IT_D (old name INTGR_D) Specification version : 1.7 (04/02/01)

IT_R (old name INTGR_R) Specification version : 1.7 (04/02/01)
36.2 Function
Inputs :
IN : Analogue input, variable which can be integrated according to one of two integration
time constants.
I2C : Logic action for choice of Second Integration Constant for integrators.
IV : Analogue input of Integrator initialisation,
IC : Logic input requesting initialisation of output,
Outputs :
RE : Operator analogue output.
Parameterisation :
I1 : The adjustment of the value for the first integration constant
I2 : The adjustment of the value for the second integration constant
TY : Logic choice for I1 & I2 integrator constant scale.

abcd
If I1 > 100 000 Then I1 = 100 000

If I2 > 100 000 Then I2 = 100 000
If IC (K) = 1 Then RE (K) = IV (K)
Else If I2C(K)= 0 (1st integration constant) Then RE (K) = RE (K-1) + (IN (K) * I1(function of Te &
TY scale)).
Else (2nd integration constant) Then RE (K) = RE (K-1) + (IN (K) * I2 (function of
Te & TY scale)).
value value
Inputs
IN input D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
I2C Integration constant BOOL Y 1= Int. #2 selected N 0 Y
#2 selection
IV Init value D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IC init order BOOL Y N 0 Y
Outputs
RE Result limited D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y 0
between LO and HI (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Parameters
I1 Integration constant D/R N 0 to+100000 Y Y
#1 0,000 to 100,000 r/s or
r/min (see TY)
I2 Integration constant D/R N 0 to+100000 N 0 Y
#2 0,000 to 100,000 r/s or
r/min (see TY)
TY © I1 & I2 scale in B N 0-> r/s ;1-> r/min N 0 Y
r/min
LO © Minimum value for D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N -20000 Y
RE (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
HI © Maximum value for D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N 20000 Y
RE (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

abcd
36.4 Use
36.5 SPECIFICATIONS

REP10P6 RE(K-1)*1000000 D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
REP RE(K-1) D 0 R
• 4 booleans and 7 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable) for IT_D,
• 4 booleans and 5 reals (amongst which 1 state variable) for IT_R.
IT_D() and IT_R().

abcd
Section 37 ITT_D : IT_D INTEGRATOR WITH TIME IN SECONDS
ITT_D Specification version : 1.1 (03/24/03)
37.2 Function
Inputs :
IN : Analogue input, variable which can be integrated according to one of two integration
time constants.
I2C : Logic action for choice of Second Integration Constant for integrators.
IV : Analogue input of Integrator initialisation,
IC : Logic input requesting initialisation of output,
Outputs :
RE : Operator analogue output.
Parameterisation :
I1 : The adjustment of the value for the first integration constant
I2 : The adjustment of the value for the second integration constant
TY : Logic choice for I1 & I2 integrator constant scale.
n value value
Inputs

abcd
n value value
IN input I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
I2C Integration constant BOOL Y 1= Int. #2 selected N 0 Y
#2 selection
IV Init value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IC init order BOOL Y N 0 Y
Outputs
RE Result limited I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y 0
between LO and HI (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Parameters
I1 Integration constant I/D N 0 to+90 000 if TY = 0 Y Y
#1 > 90 000 and < 6 000
000 if TY = 1 (see TY)
I2 Integration constant I/D N 0 to+90 000 if TY = 0 N 0 Y
#2 > 90 000 and < 6 000
000 if TY = 1 (see TY)
TY © I1 & I2 scale B N 0 for I1 or I2 < 900s ; N 0 Y
1 for I1or I2 > 900s.
LO © Minimum value for I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N -20000 Y
RE (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
HI © Maximum value for I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 20000 Y
RE (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
37.4 Use
37.5 SPECIFICATIONS

REP10P6 RE(K-1)*1000000 D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
REP RE(K-1) D 0 R
• 4 booleans and 7 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).
IT_D().

abcd

abcd
Section 38 LEADLAG_D : LEAD LAG FILTER
LEADLAG _D Specification version : 1.0 (04/22/02)
38.2 Function
Input Output
Inputs :
IN : Filter analogue input,
Outputs :
RE : Function filter result
Parameterisation :
TN : Adjustment of the operator time constant of numerator
TD : Adjustment of the operator time constant of denominator
The TN and TD time constants are parameters in ms.
Analogical equivalent function (1+TN*p)/(1+TD*p).
value value
Inputs
IN Input D Y -214 747 to +214 747 Y Y
(-2147,47 to 2147,47 %)
Outputs

abcd
value value
RE Output D Y -214 747 to +214 747 Y Y 0
(-2147,47 to 2147,47 %)
Parameters
TN Constant time of D N 500 to 15 000 N 0 Y
numerator (0,5s to 15,000s ; 0 allowed)
TD Constant time of D N 30 to 10 000 N 30 Y
denominator (0,030s to 10,000s ; 0
forbidden)
38.4 Use
38.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 3 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).
LEADLAG_D().

abcd
Section 39 LELAGMC_(I,D) : LEAD LAG FILTER
LELAGMC _I Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01)

LELAGMC _D Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01)
39.2 Function
Input Output
Inputs :
Outputs :
ENO : Output Error
Parameterisation :
CFn Adjustment of the operator cut-off frequency numerator
CFd Adjustment of the operator cut-off frequency denominator
Analogical equivalent function (1+τn*p)/(1+τd*p) with τn =1/(2*πCFn) and τd =1/(2*πCFd)
If CFn (K) != CFn (K-1) Then

If CFn (K) != 0 Then Qn (K) =exp (-Te*2*PI*CFn(K))
Else Qn(K) = 0
Else Qn(K) = Qn (K-1).
If CFd (K) != CFd (K-1) Then
If CFd (K) != 0 Then Qd (K) =exp (-Te*2*PI*CFd(K))
Else Qd(K) = 0
Else Qd(K) = Qd (K-1).

abcd
RE (K) = ((1-Qd)*IN(K)-Qn*(1-Qd)* IN (K-1)+Qd*(1-Qn)* RE (K-1))/(1-Qn)
IF Calculation error or out of range Then ENO(K) = TRUE
value value
Inputs
IN Input I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Outputs
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ENO Result Indicator BOOL Y 1 = RE invalid N - Y 0
.
Parameters
CFn cut-off frequency I/D N 0 to 2500 N 0 Y
numerator (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)
CFd cut-off frequency I/D N 0 to 2500 N 0 Y
denominator (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)
39.4 Use
39.5 SPECIFICATIONS

CFNP cut-off frequency numerator (K-1) I/D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
CFDP cut-off frequency denominator (K-1) I/D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
A Pre-calculated value of 1-Qd D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
B Pre-calculated value of Qn(1-Qd) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
C Pre-calculated value of Qd(1-Qn) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
D Pre-calculated value of 1-Qn D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
REP1000 RE(K-1) D 0 R
INP1000 IN(K-1) D 0 R
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 10 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).

abcd
LELAGMC_D().

abcd
Section 40 LPMC_(I,D) : LOW PASS FILTER
LPMC _I Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01)

LPMC _D Specification version : 1.4 (04/02/01)
40.2 Function
Input Output
Inputs :
Outputs :
ENO : Output Error
Parameterization :
CF Adjustment of the operator cut-off frequency
IV : INIT VALUE .
GN : GAIN VALUE .
If CF (K) != 0 Then
If CF (K) != CF (K-1) Then Q (K) =exp (-Te*CF(K)*2*PI)
Else Q(K) = Q (K-1).
r (K) = IN (K) + Q*( r (K-1)- IN (K))

RE(K) = GN * r (K)
Else (CF (K) = 0) RE (K) = GN * IN (K)

abcd
If First cycle Then RE (K) = IV
IF Calculation error or out of range Then ENO(K) = TRUE
value value
Inputs
IN Input I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Outputs
RE Output I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y Y IV
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ENO Result BOOL Y 1 = RE invalid N - Y 0
Indicator .
Parameters
CF cut-off I/D N 0 to 2500 Y Y
frequency (0 to 25.00Hz ; 0 inactive)
IV Init Value I/D N -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
GN Gain value I/D N -20000 to+20000 N 100 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00) (1)
40.4 Use
40.5 SPECIFICATIONS

CFP cut-off frequency numerator (K-1) I/D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
Q Pre-calculated coeficient Q(K-1) D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
r r(K-1) D 0 R
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 5 doubles (amongst which 1 state variable).

abcd
LPMC_D().

abcd
Section 41 LTH_B : BOOLEAN LOGICAL THRESHOLD
41.1 REPRESENTATION
41.2 FUNCTION

[TY] = 2 (>) : The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of more [NB] inputs is set logical 1.
[TY] = 1 (≥): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of at least [NB] inputs is set logical 1.
[TY] = 0 (=): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of exactly [NB] inputs is set logical 1.
[TY] = -1 (≤): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status of [NB] or less inputs is set logical 1.
[TY] = -2 (<): The output [RE] is set to logical 1 if the status less [NB] inputs is set logical 1.
IF [TY] is different of { -2,-1,0,1,2} then [TY] is set to 0.
IF [NB] is higher than number of input x then [NB] is set to number of input x.
IF [NB] is lower than or equal to 0 then [NB] is set to 1.
This block can be extended until 8 inputs.

abcd
NB = MAX ( MIN ( NB ; n ) ; 0 )
TOT = ( IN1 + IN2 + … + INn ) / NB
If TY <> { -2,-1,0,1,2} Then
TY = 0
Else
TY = TY
Endif
If TY = 2 Then
If TOT > 1 Then
RE = 1
Else
RE = 0
Endif
Endif
If TY = 1 Then
If TOT ≥ 1 Then
RE = 1
Else
RE = 0
Endif
Endif
If TY = 0 Then
If TOT = 1 Then
RE = 1
Else
RE = 0
Endif
Endif
If TY = -1 Then
If TOT ≤ 1 Then
RE = 1
Else
RE = 0
Endif
Endif
If TY = -2 Then
If TOT < 1 Then
RE = 1
Else
RE = 0
Endif
Endif

abcd
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input value 1 B N - Y - Y - -

IN2 Input value 2 B N - Y - Y - -
IN3 Input value 3 B N - N 0 Y - -
INx Input value x with B N - N 0 Y - -
x≤8
Outputs
RE Output B Y - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
TY Type of test I N - Y - Y - -
= -2 then <
= -1 then ≤
= 0 then =
= 1 then ≥
= 2 then >
NB Threshold value W N [1,n] N 2 Y - -
41.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None
41.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variable : 1 boolean.

abcd
LTH_B().

abcd
Section 42 MAX_WB_D : MAXIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL
MAX_WB_D Specification version : 1.5 (01/26/01)
42.1 REPRESENTATION
Example with 4 inputs
Low value
IN1
IV1 = 0
M
IN2 A
IV2 = 0
X
IN3
IV3 = 0
IN4 RE
IV4 = 0 BK
AND DF

abcd

abcd
42.2 FUNCTION
This function block select the highest of undisturbed input [INx]. If all input signals are bad
[IVx] then the output [RE] equal the backup value [BK] and the defect [DF] is seted to 1.
If the backup value [BK] is not defined then if all input [INx] are bad data quality [IVx] then
the output [RE] equal the last value of output [RE] (t-1) before defect.
The low value when one input is in bad data quality is in function of type of the input:
- Input is Word or Long : Low value equal 0.
- Input is Integer : Low value equal - 32768.
- Input is Double : Low value equal - 2147483648.
- Input is Real : Low value equal -3,4e +38 .
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Mand. Advised First scan
Connection value Data parameters value
value
Inputs
IN1 Input value 1 W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -

IV1 Valid Input 1 B Y 1 = Input # 1 N 1 Y - -
valid
valid
INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N Low Y - -
value
IVx Valid Input x B Y 1 = Input # x N 1 Y - -
valid
IN8 Input value 8 W,I,D,L ,R N - N Low Y - -
value
valid
BK Backup value W,I,D,L ,R N - N RE (t-1) N - -
Outputs
RE Output value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - BK if connected
else Low value
DF All inputs invalid B N - N - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -

abcd
42.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None.
42.5 SPECIFICATION
MAX_WB_D().

abcd
Section 43 MED(2)_(D,R) : MEDIAN THRESHOLD
MED(2)_D Specification version : 1.5 (09/30/2005)

MED(2)_R Specification version : 1.5 (09/30/2005)
43.2 Function
This block checks if a input summation belongs to a gap defined by [TH] and [BD]
parameters.
NORMAL OPERATION : The output is set as follows :
If [TY] = 1
| then :
| If | ( ∑INn ) - [TH] | < [BD]
| | then : RE = 1
| | else : RE = 0
| Endif
| else :
| If | ( ∑INn ) - [TH] | > [BD]
| | then : RE = 1
| | else : RE = 0
| Endif
Endif
| ( ∑INn ) - TH | < BD | ( ∑INPn ) - TH | > BD

TY = 1 RE = 1 RE = 0
TY = 0 RE = 0 RE = 1

abcd
43.3 Arguments characteristics :
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input 1 Y Y - N - -
IN2
…
Input 2
Input …
Double for Y
MED_D,real …
]− ∞;+∞[ N
…
0
0
N
…
IN8 Input 8 for MED_R. Y N 0 N
Outputs
RE Output or
Result
Boolean N [0;1] Y Y - -
Parameters
TH Threshold
value
Double for
MED_D,real
N ]− ∞;+∞[ Y N - -
for MED_R.
BD Gap or Double for N [0;+∞[ Y Y - -
Band value MED_D,real
for MED_R.
TY Direction or
Type
Boolean N
[0;1] Y N - -
This block can be real or double integer.

IN1 to 8(2), TH & BD are the same type for each type of block.
RE & TY are boolean type for each type of block
43.4 Use
IN1 to 8(2) : INPUT : Double for MED(2)_D,real for MED(2)_R input, IN1
mandatory.
RE : OUTPUT : boolean output, mandatory.
TH : TRESHOLD VALUE : Double for MED(2)_D,real for MED(2)_R
input.

abcd
BD : GAP or BAND VALUE : Double for MED(2)_D,real for

MED(2)_R input.
TY : DIRECTION or TYPE DEFINITION : boolean input.
[BD) parameter must be positive, else the output will be set to the two’s complement
of [TY] parameter. TH, BD and TY are User parameters. This block is not an historical
block.
Associated FGT :
Scheme
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 10 doubles for MED_D ,

1 boolean and 6 doubles for MED2_D ,
1 boolean and 10 reals for MED_R,
1 boolean and 6 reals for MED2_R.
MED_D() and MED_R().

abcd
Section 44 MIN_WB_D : MINIMUM OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP SIGNAL
MIN_WB_D Specification version : 1.5 (01/26/01)
44.1 REPRESENTATION
High value
IN1
IV1 = 0
M
IN2 I
IV2 = 0
N
IN3
IV3 = 0
IN4 RE
IV4 = 0 BK
AND DF

abcd
44.2 FUNCTION
This function block select the lowest of undisturbed input [INx]. If all input signals are bad [IVx] then
the output [RE] equal the backup value [BK] and the defect [DF] is seted to 1.
If the backup value [BK] is not defined then if all input [INx] are bad data quality [IVx] then the
output [RE] equal the last value of output [RE] (t-1) before defect.
The high value when one input is in bad data quality is in function of type of the input :
- Input is Word or Long : High value equal 65535.

- Input is Integer : High value equal + 32767.
- Input is Double : High value equal + 2147483647.
- Input is Real : High value equal + 3,4e +38 .
value
Inputs

valid
valid
INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N High Y - -
value
valid
IN8 Input value 8 W,I,D,L ,R N - N High Y - -
value
valid
Outputs
else High value
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -

abcd
44.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None.
44.5 SPECIFICATION
MIN_WB_D().

abcd
Section 45 MODBUS_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
MODBUS_M Specification version : 1.1 (02/11/03)
45.2 Function
This FB realize 4 main MODBUS functions

Reading Words; Writing Words; Reading Bits; Writing Bits;
The Write Bits function works only if a WBITS table is connected
The new demand must be validate by VAL input, when EXRE is equal to zero.
Only one FB can be used on one channel at a time (i.e. : 2max by CMM311).
Output data (for reading functions) are ready when EXRE equal 0
The first 2 words of the exchange table are reserved for driver internal use.
Defaults are set during 4 seconds.
Inputs:
TREAT: Treatment choice
SNB : Slave number
FEA : First Element Address
NB : NumBer of elements
VAL : VALidate function request input
WBITS Write BITS exchange table, must be in %M boolean memory.
Parameterization :
CHA : CHAnnel
SLOT: SLOT number,
Outputs:
TABLE: Modbus exchange (input / output) TABLE
DF: DeFault Indicator
EXRE: EXchange REport

abcd
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Mand Advis. First
Conne value Data Param. scan
ction value value
Inputs
TREAT Treatment choice D N 0=Init Y Y
1 or 2 =n bits read (1 or 2 function
code)
3 or 4 =n words read (3 or 4 function
code)
15 = n bits write (15 code) if WBITS
table connected
16 = n words write (16)
SNB Slave number D N 1 à 255,0 for PC or diffusion Y Y
FEA First element address D N Y Y
NB Elements number D N word read 1 to 128 Y Y
word write 1 to 100
bit read 1 to 2048
bit write 1 to 800
VAL demand VALidate input BOOL. Y 1=Valid demand Y Y
Outputs
DF Indicator result BOOL. Y 1=Default exchange N Y 0
EXRE Exchange report D N 3 = Exchange running Y Y -4
2 = Exchange in memory
1 = Waiting
0 = Successful exchange
-1=transmission fault
-2=no Reponses by PS
-3=data length error
-4= must be initialised
-5=software error
-6=reception fault
-7=PAE fault
-8=CRC fault
-9=time out
-10=no correct response
-11=out by PS
-12=out by PC
-13=start exchange time out
-14= not initialised
-15= wrong type table
-16= Function code sent invalid
-17= function code expected invalid
-18= length data expected invalid
TABLE Modbus input / output table TW N Y Y
(130 elements)
WBITS Write BITS exchange table TBOOL N N Y
(800 bits elements in %M
boolean memory)
Parame
ters
CHA © Channel D N 1-2 Y Y
SLOT © Slot number D N 2-10 Y Y

abcd
45.4 USE
Commisioning guide :
Error type Error generated Signification of the value of EXRE

EXRE = i
First controller cycle -4 must be initialised (pre-initialisation)
-14 not initialised
Incorrect asked data number -3 data length error
Default of hardware configuration of the module PCM -4 Initialisation required
Hardware default of the module PCM301 -5 Error soft ware
Wire break -7 PAE default
CRC fault on the answer -8 CRC fault
Serial link configuration different between PCM301 and the slave -9 No response of the question after a
controller (speed, parity, slave number) delay
Wrong function code on the answer -10 No correct response
Read or write on a forbidden range memory of the slave controller. -11 Not acceptance by PS of a PC
requirement
The Wbit table (for writing bit) is not in %M boolean mémory -15 wrong type table
Asked function code unknown, not in the list (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 15, 16). -16 Function code sent invalid
45.5 SPECIFICATIONS

State Variable table (view description
ST[30] I - Memorization but no Redundant Variable
below)
EXRE State Variable D -4 Memorization but no Redundant Variable
Internal State table ST [30] Description :

0 Command Comm_req_rec : 5
1 Address Word
2 Slot et rack
3 Task id
4
5 Length Command : 6 Word
6 Wait
7 Type of memory
8 Offset
9 Idle time
10 Max comm time
11 One DE max : 9 Word
…
19
20 Answer One RE max : 5 Word
…
24

abcd
25 Services Working Zone : 5 Word Services Bits bit0:ACK(by UE) ; bit1: NACK ; bit2: UE in service
bit3: UE out of service ; bit4: set back voluntary of UE
bit8: too much trigged DE; bit9: too much periodic DE
bit10: : too much cyclic DE; bit11: Reject DE in progress
bit12: No trigged DE ; bit13: No periodic DE
bit14: No cyclic DE
26 status Address FF if default
27 DE Report n°0 One DE state : default bits of DE:
bit0: exchange is running bit4: reception default
bit1: exchange is finished bit5: PAE default
without fault bit6: CRC error (RTU) or LRC(ASCII)
bit2: exchange is finished with bit7: non-ASCII character
fault bit8: no answer after temporisation
bit3: DE valid (DE is in list for bit9: waiting function code error
emission) bit10:data length error
bit11:CF or data is erroneous
bit12: no correct answer after Nb repeat
bit13:reject of 1 DE by PS
bit14:reject of 1 DE by PC, exchange running
bit15: reject of 1 DE by PC, DE list full
28
29 Tempo
Internal variables : 2 booleans and 30 integers.
MODBUS_M().

abcd
Section 46 MODBUS3I_M : MODBUS MASTER FOR RX3i
MODBUS3I_M Specification version: 1.1 (06/24/06)

MODBUS3I_PORT1_M Specification version: 1.2 (06/26/08)
MODBUS3I_PORT2_M Specification version: 1.2 (06/26/08)
46.2 Function
The function block MODBUS3I_M realises 4 main MODBUS functions available for a RX3i controller:
• Read n bit(s)
• Read n word(s)
• Write n bit(s)
• Write n bit(s)
[TABLE] is an Output. It serves to read the Modbus Exchanges (Output Table).
[TABLE_IN] is an Input. It serves to write bits and words (Input Table).

abcd
This function block is dedicated to communicate with only one port of the CPU310 module.
For communication with the both ports (RS232: Port1 and RS485: Port2), two FB
MODBUS3I_PORT1_M & MODBUS3I_PORT2_M blocks must be used.
Important note:
A buffer area for internal use, in %R, is necessary (150 registers in size).
The %W memory specific for RX3i controller is not use in MC RX3i application.
Input:
Enable: Enable the MODBUS3i_M block for communication
TREAT: Function Code (FCi)

S_ID Slave Number to send the request
FEA First Element Address
NB_EL: Number of elements
TABLE_IN Write WORDS exchange table (words to be write) - reserved for FC16
Output:
EXRE: Return value for Exchange Report
DF: Communication or FB fault
TABLE: Modbus Table exchange – reading result (Words, Bits)
Parameters:
Slot: Slot number of RX3i CPU310 board
Port: Port number which is use for the communication (RS232 or RS485)
Offset: Local (internal) buffer start address in %R memory
TimeOut: Time out request (in ms)
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. Mand Advised First

g Conne value . Data parameters scan
ction value value
Inputs
Enable Enable the Modbus block B Y 0: Disable Y Y
communication 1: Enable
TREAT Function Code used for the D N 1 or 2 : n bits read Y Y
communication 3 or 4 : n words read
15 : n bits
16 : n words write
(FC15-16 [TABLE_IN]
must be connected)
S_ID Slave Number (Slave ID) D N Valid numbers: 1 to 247 Y Y
FEA First Element Address to read D N Depending to the Modbus Y Y
/ write Table

abcd

g Conne value . Data parameters scan
ction value value
NB_EL Number of elements to read / D N See function code chart Y Y
write
TABLE_IN Write words exchange table TW N Write Bit exchange table N Y 0
(WRITE) (max: 150)
Outputs
EXRE Exchange report D N See the exchange report Y Y -1
table
TABLE Modbus Table Exchange TW N 150 elements Y Y
DF Indicator result B Y 1: error / 0: no error Y Y
Parameters
Slot Slot number of the RX3i D N 1 – 14 (for RX3i) Y 2 Y
Port Serial port number use for the D N 1 or 2 Y Y
communication (1: RS232 : 2: 1 for
RS485) MODBUS3I_PORT1_M
2 for
MODBUS3I_PORT2_M
Offset Internal buffer start address TW N 150 elements Y Y

(offset). Must be in %R.
TimeOut Time out request (in ms) D N 0 – 10000 Y 1000 Y
Note:
The input [TABLE_IN] is not mandatory (no mandatory connection) with reading function codes
(FC1 – 4) but mandatory with writing function codes (FC15, 16).

abcd
46.4 Use
46.4.1 Function Code Chart
n bits read:
Function Code 1 – Read Outputs [TREAT] = 1
Function Code 2 – Read Inputs [TREAT] = 2
NB – Numbers of Output to read (bits); max = 1200 (150*8)
n words read:
Function Code 3 – Read Holding Registers [TREAT] = 3
Function Code 4 – Read Input Registers [TREAT] = 4
NB – Numbers of Registers to read (16 bit words); max = 125
n bits write:
Function Code 15 – Write Multiple Coils [TREAT] = 15
[TABLE_IN] must be connected

NB – Numbers of Output to write (bits); max = 1200
Note: [TABLE_IN] is a word table. Each elements represent 16 bits.
n words write:
Function Code 16 – Write Multiple Registers [TREAT] = 16
[TABLE_IN] must be connected

NB – Numbers of Registers to write (16 bit words); max = 120
Note : For the write operations, the output [TABLE] is equal [TABLE_IN].
46.4.2 How the Function Block works
• All inputs and parameters must be connected (except [TABLE_IN] according to the function
code):

abcd
• The parameter [SLOT] is the slot number where the RX3i CPU is. [SLOT]
must be set before to start the FB.
• [PORT] is the port number used for the communication. [PORT] must be
set before to start the FB.
• To work, the FB needs internal memory (150 words in %R). [OFFSET] set
the offset in this memory area.
• [TIMEOUT] selects the time before the request must be received. If
[TIMEOUT] > 10000, the FB set [TIMEOUT] to 10000.
• Each cycle time, the FB sends a request (read or write) to the selected Modbus slave if [Enable]
is set to 1
• The [DF] output indicates when the FB is in fault. And for more details see the [EXRE] output
with the Exchange report Table
• The output [EXRE] informs about the state of the communication and state of the FB
• The output [TABLE] gives the value read from the slave.
To Read data:
It’s possible to read Output(s), Input(s), Holding register(s), Input register(s).
All reading data are written into [TABLE]. The following actions have to be performed:
• Select the correct function code [TREAT]
• Set the slave ID [S_ID]
• Set the first element address [FEA] and the number of elements [NB_EL] to read from
the slave
Important note:
The reading values in [TABLE] are available, only when [EXRE] = 0 and [DF] = 0.
To Write data:
It’s possible to write (multiple) coil(s), (multiple) register(s):
• Write bit(s) (coil(s)):
• The bit(s) to be written must be present in the [TABLE_IN] input
• Set the first element address [FEA] and the number of elements [NB_EL] to write in the
slave
• Write word(s) (register(s)):
• The word(s) to be written must be present in the [TABLE_IN] input
• Set the first element address [FEA] and the number of elements [NB_EL] to write in the
slave

abcd
46.4.3 Exchange report table
[EXRE] indicates the report number. And the following table is used to interpret the value.
[EXRE]
1 In Progress
0 Success
-1 Timeout – response was not received within timeout. / Bloc not initialised
-2 Bad Port Number – Port number must be 1 or 2
-3 Bad Slave ID – Slave ID must be in the range 1-247
-4 Bad Function Code – Function Code must be 1,2,3,4,15,16
-5 First Element Address is Zero, must be > 0
-6 Bad Local Address Offset – Start Addr + num of items > size of segment
-7 Bad Rack Slot - CPU is not in slot specified in “C” block
-8 Bad Buffer Offset – “C” block Input 5 not a good value need space for 150
46.5 SPECIFICATIONS
NAME DESCRIPTION TYP RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

E
Gives the status code for the
STATUS W
Modbus communication
Gives the state of the Modbus
STATE W
communication
MODBUS3I_M()

abcd
Section 47 MODBUS7_M : MODBUS MASTER INTERFACE C8075

MANAGEMENT
MODBUS7_M Specification version : 1.1 (01/19/04)
47.2 Function
This FB works on a C8075 only. It must be used in the first POU of the "OpLoop" program.
The purpose of this function block “ MODBUS7_M ” is to elaborate the MODBUS question and
manage, allow the demand of “Modbus Question” to one subscriber among several subscribers on
the same network.
Any question, asked to one subscriber, are established as following:
-The question is sent to one subscriber on the network
-The subscriber receives it and sends back an answer
-Then the FB MODBUS7_M analyses the answer, up-dates the status of response and gives out the
received data.
To manage those questions and answers, the flag R_WAIT is set to one when any question is in
progress, this indicator is an output parameter of the FB.
To manage the MODBUS exchange, an array of several counters and some feedback or errors are
managed and assigned to an output for maintenance or fault analysis.
This FB realises 5 main MODBUS functions:
Reading Words; Writing Words; Reading Bits; Writing Bits; Writing one Bit;
The new demand must be validated by VAL input, when R_WAIT equals zero.
Only one FB can be used on one channel at a time and only one Question number value can be
present at the same time.
Output data (for reading functions) are ready when EXRE equal 1
Defaults are set until next use of the faulted FB (Transition of VAL input from 0 to 1).
The SNB input represents Ir139 logic address of slave subscriber as defined in the configuration of
the IR139 board; refer to PSP13A4699-e "Configuring CE2000 Inputs/Outputs". The logic address fully
identifies the subscriber and the IR139 Channel within the cell.

abcd
Inputs:
SNB : Ir139 logic address of slave subscriber
TREAT: Treatment choice
FEA : First Element Address in slave suscriber
NB_VAL : NumBer of elements (or Value for one bit Write function)
VAL : VALidate function request input (only necessary for starting the exchange)
Parameterisation :
QUES : QUEStion number
Outputs:
DATA : Modbus exchange (input / output) TABLE
DF : DeFault Indicator
EXRE : EXchange REport
R_CNTR : Array of Response error and feedback counter
R_WAIT : MODBUS question in progress indicator

abcd
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def. Mand Advis. First
Conne value Data Param. scan
ction value value
Inputs
SNB IR139 logic Slave number W N 1 à 255,0 for diffusion: This number Y Y
is translated by IR139 by the final
Slave Address, as configured
TREAT Treatment choice W N 1 or 2 =n bits read (1 or 2 function Y Y
code)
3 or 4 =n words read (3 or 4 function
code)
5 or 6 One bit Write (5 or 6 function
code)
15 = n bits write (15 code)
16 = n words write (16)
FEA First element address W N Y Y
NB_VAL Elements number (or value W N word read 1 to 119 Y Y
for write or define the data word write 1 to 100
value to write for function bit read 1 to 1904
code 5 or 6 bit write 1 to 800
Value for one bit write must be :
0x00 for Writing "0"
0xff for Writing "1"
VAL demand VALidate input BOOL. Y 1=Valid demand Y Y
Outputs
DF Indicator result BOOL. Y 1=Default exchange N Y 0
EXRE Exchange report W N 0 not significant, Y Y 0
1 correct answer;
2 exception answer;
3 incorrect answer;
4 question sending fault
DATA Modbus input / output table TW N Y Y
(119 elements)
R_CNTR Array of Response error TW N Row 0 waiting answer counter (non N Y
and feedback counter significant)
(9 elements) Row 1 correct response counter
Row 2 exception response counter
Row 3 none or fault response
counter
Row 4 question error counter
Row 5 question error feedback
Row 6 response error feedback
Row 7 word 2 of response
R_WAIT MODBUS question in BOOL N 1: Exchange in progress N Y

progress 0: Not in progress
Parame
ters
QUES Question number W N 0-255 Y Y

abcd
47.4 USE
The management of the Modbus exchanges function is used in the ALSPA P320 system step 5.0 to
allow Modbus exchanges with equipment connected with C80-75 via the F8000 network and the
IR139 module fitted in a CE2000 I/O controller.
It is in charge of:
- The consideration of the Modbus questions elaborated by the automatism application,
- The management of the broadcast of the Modbus questions messages on the F8000 network after
setting in the format defined for this type of exchange,
- The management of the Modbus answers messages coming from the F8000 network,
- The putting at disposition of the application of the Modbus answers after discompacting.
All these operations are accompanied with the controls of good progress of the exchanges
(coherence of the questions and the answers, global time of answer…).
The elements of the cell C80-75 concerned by the Modbus exchanges are :
- The C80-75 head of cell controller simplex or redundant,
- The CE2000 I/O controller in charge of the coupling to the physical network Modbus (connection
RS232 / RS485) via the module IR139,
- Equipment coupled with the Modbus network.
In this architecture, the equipment Master of the Modbus exchanges is always the C80-75 controller,
the other equipment connected to the Modbus network being Slave. When the C80-75 is redundant,
only the Master CPU can emit the Modbus questions.
In the aimed typical architectures, the distribution of equipment and connections is the following one:
- 1 to 12 CE2000 controller by cell,
- 1 or 2 IR139 couplers by CE2000,
- 1 way only (physical Modbus network) used by coupler IR139,
- 1 demand of Modbus question broadcast maximum is generated during an application cycle for
each of the physical networks.
These two last items may be combined to ensure correct communication and performances.
R_CRNTR details and Explanation:

R_CNTR Array of Response error Row 0 waiting answer counter (non significant) : Perpetual counter
and feedback counter Row 1 correct response counter : EXRE = 1 counter
(9 elements) Row 2 exception response counter : EXRE = 2 counter
Row 3 none or fault response counter : EXRE = 3 counter
Row 4 question error counter : EXRE = 4 counter
Row 5 question error feedback
Row 6 response error feedback
The function block manages an array of several counters, errors and feedbacks. In case of
MODBUS link communication fault, the values in the array allow to analyse which is the fault.
Have a look at which counter is increased on R_CRNTR output.
Increases of R_CRNTR row 2, an exception response indicates that the slave subscriber answer,
but the question is incorrect, an error code is given in word 3 of response (R_CRNTR row 8).
Increases of R_CRNTR row 3, there is no or fault response, look at response error feedback
(R_CRNTR row 6).

abcd
Increases of R_CRNTR row 4, the question is incorrect and/or not sent, look at question error
feedback (R_CRNTR row 5).
47.5 SPECIFICATIONS

I_RES_CNT
Internal Reset Counter Command B - Memorization but no Redundant Variable
R
R_CNTR_V Array of error counter memorisation TW - Memorization but no Redundant Variable
R_WAIT R_WAIT memorisation B -4 Memorization but no Redundant Variable
The system array TAB_MBUS_Q_R (MODBUS Question Response array) can be useful for
debugging Modbus Exchange: It is uses to store and receive data exchanged with the system
(action demand and feedback, question for sending out, and response).
MBEM _M().
The MBEM Modbus exchange management function in C80-75 is a simple system basic function. It
is to be used in specialised function blocks developed by applications according to the specificity of
the various Modbus subscribers.
This BF is described in : USER’S MANUAL S.B.F.L.(system basic function library); P-TP21-A40067

abcd
Section 48 MOVE2W_R : CONVERSION
MOVE2W_R Specification version : 1.0 (05/17/06)
48.2 Function
Inputs :
MSW : First Input : Most Significant Word ,
LSW : Second Input : Less Significant Word,
Outputs :
REAL : IEE 754 Format Real
Convert a IEE 754 Format real coded on 2 words (16 bits) in one real (32 bits) ;
value value
Inputs
MSW Most Significant W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
Word
LSW Less Significant W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
Word
Outputs
REAL IEE 754 Format R N 3.4 E+/- 38 Y - Y
Real

abcd
48.4 Use
48.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 1 real and 2 words.
None.

abcd
Section 49 MOVER_2W : CONVERSION
MOVER_2W Specification version : 1.0 (05/17/06)
49.2 Function
Inputs :
REAL : IEE 754 Format Real
Outputs :
MSW : First Input : Most Significant Word ,
LSW : Second Input : Less Significant Word,
Convert a IEE 754 Format real (32 bits) in two words (16 bits) ;
value value
Inputs
REAL IEE 754 Format R N 3.4 E+/- 38 Y - Y
Real
Outputs
MSW Most Significant W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
Word
LSW Less Significant W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
Word

abcd
49.4 Use
49.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 1 real and 2 words.
None.

abcd
Section 50 MOVE_SP : WRITE VARIABLE IN OTHER
MOVE_SP Specification version : 1.0 (09/27/07)
50.2 Function
Inputs :
REAL or INTEGER : RW variable.
Outputs :
REAL or INTEGER : STP variable.
Write RW input in STP output ;
value value
Inputs
REAL RW Variable R N +-3.4 E+/- 38 Y - Y
INTEGER I -32768 to 32767
Outputs
REAL SetPoint R N +-3.4 E+/- 38 Y - Y
INTEGER variable I -32768 to 32767

abcd
50.4 Use
50.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : none.
None.

abcd
Section 51 MO2 / MO2W : MOTOR WITH 2 LOGIC ORDERS COMMAND

abcd
51.1 REPRESENTATION
51.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls motor with 2 logic orders commands without intermediate position
switch.

abcd
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set motor stop state with the
output [OFF_ORDER] set to 1.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set motor start state with the
output [ON_ORDER] set to 1.
the motor position (the motor stays started or stopped without starting or stopping
orders).
After a start demand (non-latched) [A(M)_ON_DMD] and if release starting [REL_ON] is
present, the motor starting order is transmitted, [ON_ORDER]. The contactor return [ON]
confirms the motor started [ON_ST]and reset starting order [ON_ORDER] .
After a stop demand (non-latched) [A(M)_OFF_DMD] and if release stopping
[REL_OFF] is present, the motor stopping order is transmitted [OFF_ORDER]. The
contactor return [OFF] confirms the motor stopped [OFF_ST]and reset stopping order
[OFF_ORDER].
If the two demands [A(M)_ON_DMD] and [A(M)_OFF_DMD] are present at the same
time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_OFF_DMD] have priority.
If the treatment realizes a stopping or starting demand, it is possible to have the reverse
demand after the output [ON_ORDER] or [OFF_ORDER] is no more presents.
The orders [ON_ORDER] and [OFF_ORDER] are exclusives.
condition.
- MOTOR SAFETY POSITION

If safety starting (latched) [SAF_ON] is set, the motor starting order is transmitted,
[ON_ORDER] is present until the contactor started [ON] is true. the treatment becomes
in safety starting state [SAF_ON_ST] as long as safety starting [SAF_ON] is set.
If safety stopping (latched) [SAF_OFF] is set, the motor stopping order is transmitted,
[OFF_ORDER] is present until the contactor stopped [OFF] is true. the treatment
becomes in safety stopping state [SAF_OFF_ST] as long as safety stopping
[SAF_OFF] is set.
[SAF_OFF] priority.
[SAF_OFF] are no more existing then the motor returns to normal operation.

abcd
- MOTOR IN PROBLEM
If the control cell is disturbed or in test mode, [DISTURB] presence or [TEST] presence,
the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the motor is in starting [ON_ST] or safety starting [SAF_ON_ST] and [ON] is lost or
[OFF] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the motor is in stopping [OFF_ST] or safety stopping [SAF_OFF_ST] and [OFF] is lost
or [ON] is present, then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the real starting time (contactor response time [ON]) is superior to the starting time
[ON_T] parameter or the real stopping time (contactor response time [OFF]) is superior
to the stopping time [OFF_T] parameter, then the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
[DES_T] corresponds to the maximum time allowed to loose the contactors after starting
or stopping order. If the real contactors disengaging time is superior to the [DES_T]
parameter then the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the motor started contactor return is defected [ON_DEF] or the motor stopped
contactor return is defected [OFF_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the motor started contactor return [ON] is present at the same time than the motor
stopped contactor return [OFF] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in
problem [PROBLEM].
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the motor order (starting or stopping) is
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] and not in
test mode [TEST] combined with [ACK_DMD] resets the motor in problem state and
allows a return to normal operation.
In test position [TEST] the power supply is interrupted inside the MCC
During safety starting or safety stopping phase the functional state [SAF_ON_ST],
[SAF_OFF_ST] are positioned until the corresponding [SAF_ON], [SAF_OFF]
disappear.
During starting and stopping phases (waiting contactor response or contactor lost), the
functional states [ON_ST], [OFF_ST] and [PROBLEM] are not positioned.
waits a demand or a contactor return to place it in the corespondent functional states.


abcd
The [CUR_OFF_T] data indicates the current value of stopping time, this value is in unit
0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [OFF_T] and decrease until 0.
The [CUR_ON_T] data indicates the current value of starting time, this value is in unit
0.01s and begin at the value of parameter [ON_T] and decrease until 0.

abcd
value value
Inputs
A_ON_DMD Auto starting dmd B N - N 0 Y - -

M_ON_DMD Manu starting dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_ON Release starting B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_ON Safety starting B N - N 0 Y - -
A_OFF_DMD Auto stopping dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
M_OFF_DMD Manu stopping dmd B N - N 0 Y - -
REL_OFF Release stopping B N - N 1 Y - -
SAF_OFF Safety stopping B N - N 0 Y - -
ON Fdc start B N - N (*) N -
ON_DEF 1 = Fdc start ON B Y - N 0 Y - -
defect
OFF Fdc stopped B N - N (*) N -
OFF_DEF 1 = Fdc stopped B Y - N 0 Y - -
OFF defect
TEST Test mode ( MCC ) B Y - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
ON_ST Starting state B N N - Y - 0
OFF_ST Stopping state B N N - Y - 0
SAF_OFF_ST Safety stopping B N N - Y - 0
state
SAF_ON_ST Safety starting state B N N - Y - 0
ON_ORDER Starting order B N Y - Y - 0
OFF_ORDER Stopping order B N Y - Y - 0
CUR_OFF_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
stopping time in
decreasing way
CUR_ON_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
starting time in
decreasing way
CUR_DES_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
disengaging time in
decreasing way
Parameters - - - - - - - - -

abcd
value value
step 1
OFF_T Contactor response D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
time after an 100 = 1s
stopping demand
ON_T Contactor response D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
time after an 100 = 1s
starting demand
DES_T Contactor D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
after an starting or
stopping demand
51.4 CONFIGURATION
• TYPE MO1 or FC :
Without test feedback from MCC.
• TYPE BKR :
- It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.
• TYPE MO1 or FC or BKR with one feedback missing (ON or OFF).
If [ON] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created
outside the block.
If [OFF] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created
outside the block.
• USE
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None

abcd

abcd
51.5 SPECIFICATION
• 10 booleans, 10 integers, 2 words (amongst which 1 state variable) and 12 doubles (amongst
which 3 state variables) for MO2,
• 10 booleans, 10 integers, 5 words (amongst which 4 state variables) and 12 doubles for
MO2W.
MO2().

abcd
Section 52 MULMC_(I,D) : MULTIPLICATION
MULMC _I Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00)

MULMC _D Specification version : 1.1 (12/04/00)
52.2 Function
Inputs :
IN1 : First Input ,
IN2 : Second Input ,
Outputs :
RE : Analogue output
ENO : Output Error
ENO = 0
IF ( IN1<-32000 ) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN1=-32000 ENDIF
IF ( IN1 > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN1= 32000 ENDIF
IF ( IN2<-32000 ) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN2=-32000 ENDIF
IF ( IN2 > 32000) THEN ENO = 1 ; IN2= 32000 ENDIF
IF (IN1=0 OR IN2=0) THEN RE = 0
ELSE
RE = (IN1 * IN2)/10000 ( in double length)
IF (RE < -32000) THEN ENO = 1; RE = -32000 ENDIF
IF (RE > 32000 ) THEN ENO = 1; RE = 32000 ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
value value
Inputs
IN1 First Input I/D Y -32000 to+32000 Y - Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
IN2 Second Input I/D Y -32000 to+32000 Y - Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
Outputs
RE Output I/D N -32000 to+32000 Y - Y 0
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
ENO Output Error BOOL N 1 = Output Error N - Y 0
or input out of range
52.4 Use
52.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 2 doubles.
MULMC_D().

abcd
Section 53 MVS_WB_D : MEAN VALUE OF 2 N INPUT WITH BACKUP

SIGNAL
MVS_WB_D Specification version : 1.7 (04/08/2002)
53.1 REPRESENTATION
Example with 4 inputs and NB = 2
0
IN1
IV1 = 0
S
IN2 U DIV
IV2 = 0
M
IN3
IV3 = 0
1
MAX
IN4 RE
IV4 = 0 BK
S
Copyright © ALSTOM 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use
DFor disclosure to third parties without express
U <
M NB = 2
USER'S MANUAL NBVAL
211/420
abcd

abcd
53.2 FUNCTION
This function block calculs the mean of undisturbed input [INx]. If less [NB] input signals are
good [IVx] then the output [RE] equal the backup value [BK] and the defect [DF] is set.
NBVAL is the number of undisturbed input [INx].
If the backup value [BK] is not defined then if all input [INx] are bad data quality [IVx] then
the output [RE] equal the last value of output [RE] (t-1) before defect.
If [NB] value is higher than number of input x then [NB] = x.
If [NB] value is lower than number of input x then [NB] = 1.
value
Inputs
IN1 Input value 1 W,I,D,L,R Y - Y - Y - -

valid
valid
INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N 0 Y - -
valid
IN10 Input value 10 W,I,D,L ,R N - N 0 Y - -
valid
IVBK Valid Backup value B Y 1 for valid N 1 Y
Outputs
else 0
NBVAL Number of valid D N - N - Y - -

inputs
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
NB Number of W - [ 1, 10 ] N 1 Y - -
minimum good
value

abcd
53.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None.
53.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal Variable and State variables

None
Function block code
None
Basic function used :
None

abcd
Section 54 OSC_D : OSCILLATOR
OSC_D Specification version : 1.3 (01/29/01)
54.1 representation
54.2 Function
• INITIALISATION :
The output RE is equal to 0.
The output RE is equal to 0 during the time defined by the parametre T_NACT.
The output RE is equal to 1 during the time defined by the parametre T_ACT.
If T_ACT and(or) T_NACT is less than cycle time, it is considered to be 0
then the output RE is always equal at 0. The real time is function of cycle
time.
The output RE is calculated in function of cycle time.
Example : If T_ACT = 190 (1.9 sec.) and IF Tcyc = 0,5 sec, the output RE
is equal at 1 during (1.9 / 0.5 = 3 « integer ») 3 cycles therefore ( 3 * 0. 5 =
1.5) 1.5 seconds.

abcd
value value
Inputs - - - - - - - - -
Outputs
RE Output B Y - Y - Y - 0
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
T_ACT Time duration for Duration N - Y - Y -
output = 1
T_NACT Time duration for Duration N - Y - Y -
output = 0
54.4 USE :
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None
None
• Scheme :
None
54.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 1 duration

(amongst which 1 state variable).

abcd
OSC().

abcd
Section 55 OSL : ONE-SHOT LIMITED
55.1 REPRESENTATION
55.2 FUNCTION

The dynamic input triggers a single pulse, the maximum duration of which is given by the time
TP parameter.However, if the input signals returns to zero, the output will do the same, even if
the specified time TP has not yet elapsed since the start of the pulse.
TP : DURATION
The output REB is calculated in function of cycle time.
1.5 seconds.

abcd
IN
0
REB
0
TP
TP TP
TP
RET
0
value value
Inputs
IN Input value B N - Y - Y - -
Outputs
REB Output result B N - Y - Y - -
RET Output time D N Unit 0.01s N - Y - -
100 = 1s
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
TP Time value D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
100 = 1s
55.4 USE :
None

abcd
• Scheme :
None
None
55.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 1 boolean (amongst which 1 state variable) and 3 doubles

OSL().

abcd
Section 56 P_STEP : STEP OF SEQUENCE CONTROL
P_STEP Specification version : 1.4 (04/15/03)
56.1 REPRESENTATION
56.2 Function
Inputs:
ACK : Acknowledge the step in case of disturbance
STOP : set all outputs to 0 (reset)
STI : step input
OVC : overrun criteria
ASI : alternative step input
T_ACT: validation of time supervision
PRC : process criteria
PR_ST: previous step
Parameterisation :
T_DELAY: delay time before activation of the next step in the sequencer
T_MON : monitoring time : maximum allowable elapsed time for activation of the step
Outputs:
STO : step output
ASO : alternative step output
ORD : order
DIST: maximum allowable elapsed time reached
CR_ST: current step
NX_ST: next step

abcd
Main function
This function block (FB) realises a step of sequence control, i.e. the block function activates a step,
and once this step is done, the next one may be activated.
For example : below, a usual use of the block “step of sequence control”. The aim is to start 2
motors : M1 and M2. In this example, the motor M1 is started at first, and before starting the motor
M2, we want to be sure that M1 is really started.
Sequence diagram Description Example
no Input STI receives a pulse. The process wants to start the

STI=1 ?
sequence motor M1.
stopped
yes
The FB sets ORD to 1 to start The FB activates the motor M1.
ORD=1 activation of the commanded
actuators.
Feed back from the process :
no the motor M1 is really started.
PRC=1 M1 required operation is done.
sequence The input PRC is set to 1.
stopped
yes (T MON
The FB sets STO to 1.

STO=1
Release to activate next step in
the sequencer .
Go to next step

abcd
Alternative functions
• The input STOP is set to 1 (whatever the other inputs and the step has been activated by a pulse
order on STI) : all the outputs are set to 0 (STO, ASO, ORD).
• The input ASI is set to 1 (whatever the other inputs but STOP=0) : - STO and ORD set to 0.
- ASO set to 1 after a time delay.
• The input OVC is set to 1 (whatever the other inputs but STO and ASI=0) : - ASO and ORD set
to 0.
- STO set to 1 at next cycle
• After the step has been activated the actuation time is monitored and DIST is set to 1 if this time
exceeds T_MON. This time supervision can be inhibited by the input T_ACT (end step )
• The inputs ASI, OVC and PRC are validated only if the step has been activated, that is if the
internal signal (ACTIVE) has been set to 1 by a pulse order on STI.
• The time delay aims to avoid processing two steps at the same time. External logic may be added
to make sure that such a situation never occurs.
• In case of disturbance in one sequence all outputs of the steps are set to 0 by the input STOP
(order sent by a ‘function group’ block)
• The inputs ACK Acknowledge the step in case of disturbance
If ACTIVE then CR_ST=PR_ST + 1

Else CR_ST=0
NX_ST= PR_ST + 1 always
Truth table:
Inputs Internal Outputs
STOP STI ASI OVC PRC ACK ACTIVE DIST STO ASO ORD comments
1 x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 Step stuck
0 0→1 0 0 0 0→1 0 0 0 0→1 Only way to activate the step
0 x 0 0 0→1 1→0 0→1 0 1→0 End of step activation, there is a
after time delay to avoid having two
a time steps running at the same time
delay
0 x 0→ x x 1→0 0 0→1 1→0 ASI has the priority over OVC
1 at next and PRC
cycle
0 x 0 0→1 x 1→0 0→1 0 1→0 OVC has the priority over PRC
at next
cycle
0 0→1 0 0 1 0 0→1 0 0 The actuators commanded by the
step are not activated
0 0→1 1 x x 0 0 0→1 0 The actuators commanded by the
0 0→1 0 1 x 0 0→1 0 0 The actuators commanded by the

abcd
1 0→1 DIST is set only if a timeout is

if detected during active phase.
timeout
0 0 x x x 0 0 0 0 Waiting state
x x x x 1 1 1 1->0 0→1 0 0 Acknoledge Disturbance state

abcd
Name Description Type Neg Range Mand. Def Mand Advis First
Connection value Data Param scan
value value
Inputs
ACK Acknoledge BOO Y N Y
disturbance L
state
STOP stop the step BOO Y 1 = active Y Y
L
STI step input BOO Y Y Y
L
OVC overrun criteria BOO Y Y Y
L
ASI alternative step BOO Y Y Y
input L
T_ACT Time BOO Y Y Y
supervision L
activation
PRC process criteria BOO Y Y Y
L
PR_ST Previous step W N Y Y
Outputs
STO step output BOO Y N Y 0
L
ASO alternative step BOO Y N Y 0
output L
ORD order BOO Y N Y 0
L
DIST maximum time BOO Y Y Y 0
reached L
CR_ST Current step W N N Y 0
NX_ST next step W N N Y 0
Parameters
T_DELA Delay time W N 0 to Y Y
Y 32000
for 0 to
320.00s
T_MON Speed Filter cut W N 0 to Y Y
off Frequency. 32000
for 0 to
320.00s

abcd
56.4 Use
56.5 SPECIFICATIONS
NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE RANGE INIT. (R)

VAL
ACTIVE 1 =step active BOOL Redundant Variable
ASO to be sent at the next
ASOW BOOL - Redundant Variable
cycle
Nb of cycles allowed
MAXCYC W Redundant Variable
remaining
STIP STI value at previous step BOOL Redundant Variable
STO to be send at the next
STOW BOOL - Redundant Variable
cycle
Memorisation but no
ASO BOOL -
Redundant Variable
Memorisation but no
DIST BOOL
Redundant Variable
Nb of cycles reaching Memorisation but no
MAXDELAY W
T_DELAY Redundant Variable
Memorisation but no
ORD BOOL -
Redundant Variable
Memorisation but no
STO BOOL -
Redundant Variable

abcd
P_STEP().

abcd
Section 57 PID : PROPORTIONAL INTEGRATED DERIVATED
PID_D, PID_DR : specification version 1.3 (07/22/02)
57.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
Exemple of tracking command (using TC) and integrator

inhibition (using II), without derivative action (kd=0).
100
EPS
100
RE
TC
0
II
0

abcd
Exemple of sensibility
SNS=1 SNS=0
100
EPS 0
-100
100
RE 0
-100
Detail of P, I and D
100
EPS
0
100
P
0
100
I
0
100
D
0

abcd
57.2 FUNCTION
This treatment establishes a reference with a PID governing loop (PID regulator) according
to the deviation between a measure and a set-point (or a set-point and a measure).
The output [RE] is set in accordance to the init value [IV] during the first scan.
The output [RE] is a PID function (Proportional integral derivative) according to the
difference [IN+] - [IN-].
The input [P] fixes the proportionnal action on the deviation.
The inputs [lu] fixes the increasing integral action ([IN+] > [IN-]) : 0 means no integration
and the value must be ≥ 3 * sampling Time (Sofware reacts if lu < 3 Ts).
The inputs [ld] fixes the decreasing integral action ([IN+] < [IN-]): 0 means no integration
and the value must be ≥ 3 * sampling Time (Sofware reacts if ld < 3 Ts).
The integral action is calculated with the [RET] input (the input [SV] is substracted to the
[RET], to avoid a saturation of the integrator).
The inputs [Kd] and [D] fixe the derivative action.
The output [EPS] is the difference [IN+] - [IN-].
In any case, the input [SV] is summarized to the output : [RE] = P + I + D + [SV]
• PARAMETERS MODIFICATION :
It’s possible to modify the time parameters [lu], [ld] and [D], and the gain parameters
[ki], [kd] and [P] during operation : the treatment takes the new values into account, if
they are valid.
The parameter [D] can't be set to 0 .
• TRACKING MODE :
If the tracking command [TC] is set, then the output [RE] follows tracking value [TV]
without delay. The output [TRCK] is set to 1.
• INTEGRAL INHIBITION :
When the input [II] is set to 1, the integral calculation is locked, and stays at its precedent
value.
• SENSIBILITY :
When the input [SNS] is set to 1, if the [HI] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal
decreases (but remains positive), the output [RE] decreases ( [P] * { [IN]-[IN(-1)] } ).
When the input [SNS] is set to 1, if the [LO] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal
increases (but remains negative), the output [RE] increases ( [P] * { [IN]-[IN(-1)] } ).
If the input [SNS] is set to 0, and if the [HI] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal
decreases (but remains positive), the output [RE] remains at [HI].

abcd
If the input [SNS] is set to 0, and if the [LO] limit is reached, when the [EPS] signal
increases (but remains negative), the output [RE] remains at [LO].
• LIMITATION MODE :
The output [RE] is kept between the specified high [HI] and lower [LO] limits.
If the output [RE] equal high limit [HI] then the output high limit reached [HL] is set to 1.
If the output [RE] equal low limit [LO] then the output low limit reached [LL] is set to 1.
If the low limit [LO] is greater than high limit [HI] then the output [RE] is equal to high
limit and the high reached [HL] and low limit reached [LL] are set to 1.
It’s possible to modify the specific limit [HI] [LO] during operation, in this case the output
[RE] is kept between these new limits.
value value
Inputs
IN+ Set point I,D Y - Y Y - -

IN- Measure I,D Y - N 0 Y - -
SV Shift value I,D Y - N 0 Y - -
RET Return input I,D N - N 0 Y [RE] -
II Integrator inhibition B N 1=inhibition N 0 Y - -
TC Tracking command B N 1=tracking N 0 Y - -
TV Tracking value I,D Y - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
RE Output I,D N - Y Y - IV
EPS Deviation I,D N - N Y - -
setpoint/measure
LL Low limit active B N 1=limit active N Y - -
HL High limit active B N 1=limit active N Y - -
TRK Tracking mode B N 1=tracking N Y - -
active
Parameters - - - - - - - -
IV Initial value I,D N - N 0 Y - -
LO Low limit value I,D Y - N Maxi of I,D Y - -
HI High limit value I,D Y - N Mini of Y - -
I,D
P Proportionnal gain W,D N (a) N 100 Y - -

abcd
value value
Lu Increasing W,D N Unit 0.01s Y Y ≥3 x Ts -
integrator time 100 = 1 s
constant
0=no
integration
Mini of 3
Time
sampling
Ld Decreasing W,D N Unit 0.01s Y Y ≥3 x Ts -
integrator time 100 = 1 s
constant
0=no
integration
Mini of 3
Time
sampling
Kd Derivative gain W,D N - N 0 Y - -
D Derivative time W,D N Unit 0.01s N 100 Y - -
constant 100 = 1 s
≠0
SNS Sensibility B N 1=sensibility N 0 Y - -
(a) The Gain value is defined as following :

Type D,W,I,L then 100 = Gain of 1.
Type R then 100 = Gain of 100.
57.4 CONFIGURATION
None
57.5 USE
Not applicable
• Scheme :
Operation mode scheme

abcd
[SV]
+
[IN+]
- Σ [EPS]
[IN-]
[HL]
MUL + P
+ [LL]
[P] + D Σ + Σ MIN
+ I MAX [RE]
MUL dv/dt
[Kd]
[D]
[HI]
∫
+
[RET]
[SV] - Σ
[II] [LO]
[lu]
[ld]
[HI]
[LO]
[TV]
[TC] [TRK]
Associated FGT :
None
57.6 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 3 booleans and 13 doubles (amongst which 6 state variables).
PID_D().

abcd
Section 58 PIDMC_(I,D) : PID MACHINE CONTROL
PIDMC_D Specification version : 1.9 (11/13/01)

PIDMC_R Specification version : 1.9 (11/13/01)
58.2 Function
Diagram:
INTP : Initalisation Type

IV
SP
+
RE
P.I.D x
ME
-
PITP : PI Type
Inputs :

abcd
SP : Input plus (input of setpoint),

ME : Input minus (analogue input of measurement),
INTP: Initialization type (BOOL): - TRUE = fast initialization,
- FALSE = continuous initialization.
II : Integrator Inhibition (BOOL);
PITP : PI type (BOOL): - TRUE = PID operator,
- FALSE = operator I, where P term is initialized at 1.
IV : analogue value used for initializing the integrator.
SV : shift value for adding with PID result.
Outputs :
RE : PID analogue output
EPS : Epsilon output
ENO : Output Error
Parameterization :
P The adjustment of the values for the various terms
Iu The adjustment of the values for the integration constant for positive epsilon
Id The adjustment of the values for the integration constant for negative epsilon
D The adjustment of the values for the derive constant
HI High limit value.
LO Low limit value.
Local variables : e1, e11, EPS (epsilon), PTM (proportional action), DTM (derivative action), ITM
(integral action)
IF INIT THEN
REP = 0;INTPP = 0;PTMP = 0;ITMP = 0;ITMP10P6=0;
RE=0;EPS=0;ENO=0;HL=0;LL=0;
ELSE
IF HI < LO THEN
RE = HI ;HL=1 ;LL=1;
ELSE
ENO(K) = FALSE;HL=0 ;LL=0;
e1(K) = IV(K) - RE(K-1)
IF e1(K) > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
e1(K) = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF e1(K) < range min THEN
e1(K) = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
IF e1(K) > 1o/oo THEN e11(K)= e1(K)- 1o/oo
ELSE(|e1(K)| <=1o/oo)
IF e1(K) < 1o/oo THEN e11(K) = e1(K) +1o/oo
ELSE (|e1(K)|>=1o/oo) e11(K) = 0; ENDIF
ENDIF
EPS(K) = SP(K)- ME(K) (epsilon value)
IF EPS(K) =0 OR P = 0 THEN PTM = 0
ELSE
IF ESP(K) > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;

abcd
ESP(K) = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)

ELSE IF ESP(K) < range min
THEN
ESP(K) = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
IF P > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
P = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF P < range min THEN
P = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
PTM(K) = P * EPS(K) ;
ENDIF
IF PTM(K) = PTM(K –1) OR D = 0 THEN
DTM = 0
ELSE
IF D > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
D = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF D < range min THEN
D = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
DTM(K) = ((PTM(K) - PTM(K-1)) * D)/CYC ;
ENDIF
PTM(K-1) = PTM(K)
IF ((Iu !=0) AND (Id != 0)) THEN
IF e11 !=0 (Init. In progress) THEN
IF INTP(K) =1 (MIN /MAX selector follow PID corrector )
AND INTP(K-1) =1 (Since the last iteration) THEN
IF SV > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
SV = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF SV < range min THEN
SV = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
IF (e11<0 & EPS>0) (MIN corrector follow) THEN
ITM =Hi – PTM – SV
ELSE IF (e11>0 & EPS<0) (MAX corrector follow) THEN
ITM = Lo – PTM - SV
ELSE
ITM(K)= ITM(K-1)+ e11 (instantaneous initialization with epsilon value);
ENDIF ;
ENDIF
ELSE
ITM(K) = ITM(K-1) + e11 (instantaneous initialization with epsilon value);
ENDIF
ELSE IF II==FAUX THEN

abcd
IF (PTM>0) THEN
IF Iu > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
Iu = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF Iu < range min THEN
Iu = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
ITM(K) = ITM(K-1)+ (PTM(K) * CYC * Iu)
ELSE (PTM<=0)
IF Id > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
Id = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF Id < range min THEN
Id = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
ITM(K) = ITM(K-1)+ (PTM(K) * CYC * Id) ;
ENDIF
IF ITM(K) > MAX THEN
ITM(K) = MAX
ELSEIF ITM(K) < MIN THEN
ITM(K) = MIN; ENDIF;
ENDIF
ELSE(Iu == 0 OR Id==0 : No Integral action)
ITM(K) = 0;
ENDIF
IF PITP == 1 THEN
IF SV > range max THEN ENO(K) = TRUE ;
SV = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ELSE IF SV < range min THEN
SV = range min( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ;
ENDIF
RE(K) = PTM(K) + ITM (K) + DTM(K) + SV(K)
ELSE (PITP == 0)
RE(K) = ITM (K);
ENDIF
IF RE (K) >= HI Then
RE (K) = HI ; HL=1
ELSE IF RE (K) <= LO Then
RE (K) = LO ; LL=1;
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF HI<=LO Then
Re (K) = HI ; HL=1 ; LL=1
INTP(K-1) = INTP(K)
IF Calculation error or input out of range THEN ENO(K) = TRUE
ELSE ENO(K) = FALSE; ENDIF

abcd
value value
Inputs
SP Input plus D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ME Input minus D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IV Initialization value D/R Y -20000 to +20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
PITP Corrector type BOOL Y 1 = PID + Sv / 0 =I N 1 Y
.
II Integratior Inhibition BOOL Y 1 = Integral term frozen N 0 Y
. if no init conditions
INTP Initialization Type : () BOOL Y 1 = MIN /MAX selector N 0 Y
. follow PID function ;
0 = Init. Standard
SV Shift value D/R Y -20000 to +20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Outputs
RE Output D/R Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
EPS Sortie Epsilon D/R Y -20000 to+20000 N Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ENO Output Error BOOL Y 1 = Output Error N - Y 0
Parame
ters
P Prop. Gain D/R N 0 to+10000 Y - Y
(0 to 100.00)
Iu Integrator Gain for D/R N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
Positive epsilon 0,000 to 10,000 r/s
Id Integrator Gain for D/R N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
negative epsilon 0,000 to 10,000 r/s
D Derivative. Gain D/R N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
(0 to 100.00) s
LO © Output Min D/R Y -20000 to +20000 N -20000 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
HI © Output Max. D/R Y -20000 to +20000 N 20000 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
58.4 Use
58.5 SPECIFICATIONS

REP Output (K-1) D 0 Memorization but no Redundant Variable
PTMP Proportional term(K-1) D 0 R
INTPP initialization type(K-1) BOOL 0 R
ITMP Integral term(K-1) D 0 R
ITMP10P6 10-6 part of integral action (K-1) D 0 Memorization but no Redundant Variable

abcd
• 7 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 12 doubles (amongst which 2
state variables) for PIDMC_D,
• 7 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 reals (amongst which 3 state
variables) for PIDMC_R.
PIDMC_D() and PIDMC_R().

abcd
Section 59 PIDS_(I,D) : PID CORRECTOR WITH STATISM
PIDS_I Specification version: 1.8 (02/11/02)

PIDS_D Specification version: 1.8 (02/11/02)
s6
PIPTS G
PIDS
s7
- DELTA I
ME +
s2 s5
- + +
EPS EPS P PIPT PROPINT RE
+ + +
SP s4
D
59.2 Function
Inputs :
SP : Input plus ( setpoint ),

abcd
ME : Input minus (analogue input measurement),

IV : analogue value used for initializing the integrator.
IC : Initialization order.
IRV : Insensibilisation Order.
SCI : Integration Validation.
SIL : Statism corrector validation.
ETO : Test pulse order.
Outputs :
RE : PID analogue output
EPS : Epsilon output
PIPT : Proportional term output
ENO : Output error
Parameterization :
P The adjustment of the values for the Proportional terms
I The adjustment of the values for the integration constant
D The adjustment of the values for the derive constant
S The adjustment of the values for the Statism.
INSP Insensibility range for ###-###moy > 0
INSM Insensibility range for ###- ###moy< 0
ECH Rung value for test.
HI High limit value.
LO Low limit value.
ENO(K) = FALSE
EPS(K) = SP(K) - ME(K)
IF IRV(K) = 1 THEN
IF INSM > range max THEN
INSM = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE ; ENDIF
IF INSM < range min THEN
INSM = range min (see below range in Arguments characteristics)
IF INSP > range max THEN
INSP = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
IF INSP < range min THEN
INSP = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
IF EPS(K) < INSM THEN EPS(K) = EPS(K) – INSM
ELSE IF EPS(K) > INSP THEN EPS(K) = EPS(K) – INSP
ELSE EPS(K) = 0
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ETO(K) = 1 THEN EPS(K) = EPS(K) + ECH
ENDIF
IF EPS(K) > range max THEN
EPS(K) = range max( see below input range in Arguments characteristics)

abcd

IF EPS(K) < range min THEN
EPS(K) = range min ( see below input range in Arguments characteristics)
IF D > range max THEN
D = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
IF D < range min THEN
D = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
DER(K) = ((EPS (K) - EPS (K-1)) * D) / Te
IF SIL(K) = 1 THEN
IF S > range max THEN
S = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
IF S < range min THEN
S = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
PIPTS(K)= P*S*PROPINT(K-1) / 106
DELTA(K)=PIPT(K) – PIPTS(K)
EPS(K) = EPS(K) – (S * PROPINT (K-1))
ENDIF
IF P > range max THEN
P = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
ENO(K) = TRUE; ENDIF
IF P < range min THEN
P = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
PIPT(K) = P * EPS(K)
IF IC (K) = 1 THEN INTEG(K) = IV (K) - P * EPS(K)
ELSE IF SCI (K) = 1 THEN
IF I > range max THEN
I = range max( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
IF I < range min THEN
I = range min ( see below range in Arguments characteristics)
INTEG(K) = INTEG(K-1) + LPIT(K)*DELTA(K)/ 106
ELSE
INTEG(K) =0
ENDIF
ENDIF
PROPINT(K) = PITP(K) + INTEG(K)
RE(K) = PROPINT(K)+ DER(K)
IF RE(K) > HI THEN RE(K) = HI
ELSE IF RE(K) < LO THEN RE(K) = LO
! ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
If HI<LO Then Re (K) = HI

IF Calculation error or input out of range THEN! ENO(K) = TRUE
ELSE ENO(K) = FALSE
ENDIF
value value
Inputs
SP Input plus (Set I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
point) (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ME Input minus I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(Measurement) (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IV Initialization value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
IRV Dead band function BOOL Y - N 0 Y
order .
SCI Integral action BOOL Y - N 0 Y
validation .
IC Initialization order BOOL Y - N 0 Y
.
SIL Delta action BOOL Y - N 0 Y
validation (statism) .
ETO Test pulse order on BOOL Y - N 0 Y
input plus (ECH) .
Outputs
RE Controller Output I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
PIPT PI proportional term I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
EPS Sortie Epsilon I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ENO Output error BOOL Y 1=Output error N Y 0
Parameters
INSP Dead band value I/D N 0 to+20000 N 0 Y
for ### > 0 (0 to 200,00 %)
INSM Dead band value I/D N -20000 to 0 N 0 Y
for ###< 0 (-200,00 to 0 %)
P Proportional Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 Y Y
(0 to 100.00)
I Integrator Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
0,000 to 10,000 r/s
D Derivative Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
(0 to 100.00)s
S Statism Gain I/D N 0 to+2000 N 0 Y
(0 to 20.00%)
HI © Maximum value for I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N 20000 Y
RE (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
LO © Minimum value for I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N -20000 Y
RE (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
ECH © Pulse amplitude I/D N -20000 to+20000 N 0 Y
value (-200,00 to 200,00 %)

abcd
59.4 Use
59.5 SPECIFICATIONS

PROPINT Output PI only (K-1) D 0 R
EPS Epsilon (K-1) D R
INTEG Integral term (K-1) D R
INTEG10P6 10p6 part of integral action (K-1) D Memorization but no Redundant Variable
Internal variables : 6 booleans and 12 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables).
PIDS_D().

abcd
Section 60 PM_(I,D) : PULSE MODULATION
PM_I Specification version : 1.0 (07/21/00)

PM_D Specification version : 1.0 (07/21/00)
60.2 Function
Inputs :
SP : Input plus (analogue input setpoint),
ME : Input minus (analogue input measurement),
MD : Mode inhibition.
Outputs :
POR : Plus ORder output
MOR : Minus ORder output
DF : Epsilon Default
EPS : Epsilon (after dead band) output
Parameterization :
GP : The adjustment of the values for the Proportional terms
BP : dead Band for Positive epsilon
BM : dead Band for negative epsilon
TR : Time period for Ramp.
T1 : inhibition Time after sign changed.
T2 : offset Time added to order after sign changed.
T3 : offset Time added to normal order.
TM : Max Time order.
SS : epsilon default threshold value.
TE : Temporisation for Epsilon default.

abcd
POR =0 ; MOR = 0
EPS(K) = SP(K) –ME(K)
IF EPS(K) > BP THEN EPS(K)= EPS(K)-BP ; SignEPS(K) =0
ELSEIF EPS(K) < BM THEN EPS(K)= EPS(K)-BM ; SignEPS(K) =1
ELSE EPS(K)=0 ; SignEPS(K)= SignEPS(K-1)
IF (SignEPS(K-1) =! SignEPS(K))
THEN Case = 1 (Sign changed)
IF (MD = 1) THEN POR(K) = 0 ; MOR(K) = 0 ; CPT(K)=0 ; CPT_T1(K) =0
ELSE
CPT(K)=CPT(K-1)+ CYC
IF CPT(K)>= TR THEN CPT(K)=0
IF Case = 2 THEN Case = 0
Case 0 (Normal pulse folow by T3) :
V(K) = GP*EPS(K)
IF V (K) < 0 THEN V(K) = -V(K)
V1(K) = (V(K)* TR) /100%
IF V1(K) + T3 > CPT (K) THEN
IF EPS(K) >0 THEN POR(K)=1
ELSE IF EPS(K) <0 THEN MOR(K)=1
IF CPT(K)> TM THEN POR(K) =0 ; MOR(K) = 0
Case 1 (Waiting inhibition time T1 after Sign changed) :
CPT_T1(K) = CPT_T1(K-1) + CYC
IF CPT_T1(K) >T1 THEN CPT_T1 (K)=0 ; Case = 2 ; CPT(K)=0
Case 2 (Pulse folow by T2 after Sign changed) :
V(K) = GP*EPS(K)
IF V(K) < 0 THEN V(K) = -V(K)
V1(K) = (V(K)* TR) /100%
IF V1(K) + T2 > CPT(K) THEN
IF EPS(K) >0 THEN POR(K) =1
ELSE IF EPS(K) <0 THEN MOR(K) =1
IF CPT(K)> TM THEN POR(K) =0 ; MOR(K) = 0
IF (TE=0) OR (MD=1)THEN CPTEPS(K) =0 ; DF(K)=0

ELSEIF (|EPS(K)| > SS) THEN
CPTEPS(K) = CPTEPS(K-1) + CYC ;
IF (CPTEPS(K) > TE) THEN CPTEPS(K) = TE ; DF(K) = 1
ELSE DF(K)=0
ELSE CPTEPS(K) = 0 ; DF(K)=0
Connect value . Data parameters scan
ion value value
Inputs
SP Input Plus (setpoint) I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)

abcd
Connect value . Data parameters scan
ion value value
ME Input minus I/D Y -20000 to+20000 Y - Y
(measurement) (-200,00 to 200,00 %)
MD Output inhibition BOOL. Y 1 = Inhibition N 0 Y
(initialization)
Outputs
POR Plus order output BOOL. N - Y Y 0
MOR Minus order output BOOL. N - Y Y 0
DF Epsilon default BOOL. Y - N Y 0
EPS Epsilon value I/D Y -20000 to+20000 N Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
Parameters
GP Proportional Gain I/D N 0 to+10000 Y Y
(0 to 100.00)
BP Dead band value for I/D N 0 to+10000 N 0 Y
EPS >0 (0 to 100,00 %)
BM Dead band value for I/D N -10000 to 0 N 0 Y
EPS <0 (-100,00 % to 0)
TR Time ramp (0 – 100 I/D N 0 to 10000 Y Y
%) (0 to 100,00 s)
T1 © Inhibition time when I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
EPS(k-1) =! EPS (k) (0 to 100,00 s)
T2 Minimum pulse I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
duration in case of (0 to 100,00 s)
epsilon sign
modification
T3 Minimum pulse I/D N 0 to 10000 Y Y
duration (0 to 100,00 s)
TM Maximum pulse I/D N 0 to 10000 N 1000 Y
duration (0 to 100,00 s)
SS © Threshold Value on I/D N 0 to 20000 N 10000 Y
epsilon default (0 to 200,00 %)
TE © Time duration before I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
to declare epsilon (0 to 100,00 s)
default
60.4 Use
60.5 SPECIFICATIONS

SignEPS Sign of EPS(k-1) B 0 R
CPT CPT (K-1)for Ramp period D 0 R
CPTEPS Temporisation (K-1) for Epsilon fault D 0 R
CPTT1 Order inhibition Time (K-1) D 0 R
Case Case mémoristion (K-1) I 0 R
Internal variables : 3 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable), 1 integer (amongst which 1 state
variable) and 6 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables).

abcd
PM_D().

abcd
Section 61 PREF_D : PREFERRED VALUE SELECTION
PREF_D Specification version : 1.4(01/31/01)
61.1 REPRESENTATION
BK
IN4
IV4 = 0
IN3
IV3 = 0
IN2
IV2 = 0
RE
IN1
IV1 = 0
AND DF

abcd
61.2 FUNCTION
This function block choices for output [RE], the input [INx] with the highest priority, witch
does not have bad data quality status [IVx] .The priority decreases as the number of the
input increase ( [IN1] has top priority, [IN2] is next …).
If all input [INx] are defected [IVx]=0 then the backup [BK] value is switched to the output
[RE] and the logical signal [DF] becomes true.
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input value 1 W,I,D,L,R Y - Y - Y - -

valid
valid
INx Input value x W,I,D,L,R N - N 0 Y - -
valid
IN8 Input value 8 W,I,D,L ,R N - N 0 Y - -
valid
BK Backup value W,I,D,L ,R N - Y - Y - -
Outputs
RE Output value W,I,D,L,R N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
61.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None.

abcd
61.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 9 booleans and 1 double.
PREF_D().

abcd
Section 62 PS_SPLIT_RANGE : PARALLEL SERIAL SPLIT RANGE
PS_SPLIT_RANGE Specification version : 1.2 (04/25/01)
62.2 Function
This FB do the repartition of input value according with the output low parameters (this is useful for
HP/ MP Steam flow repartition.
It can do two different repartition : one on parallel mode and one on serial mode.
The SEL input selects the parallel or serial mode.
Parameter TEMP defines temporisation for progressive switch between modes. This parameter is
taken in account only if either mode is reached.
Parameters P0, P100 define the input range corresponding to 0-100% output range in parallel
mode.
Parameters S0, S100 define the input range corresponding to 0-100% output range in serial mode.
P and S output are parallel / serial mode indicators. Both are reset when mode is switching.
Inputs:
IN : input
SEL : Parallel serial Selection : 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial
Parameterization :
P0,: parallel mode starting range.
P100: parallel mode ending range,
S0,: serial mode starting range.
S100: serial mode ending range,
TEMP : parallel / serial commutation timing.
Outputs:
RE : output
P: Parallel Indicator
S: Serial Indicator
ENO: Error Output (Disorder or out of range parameters or input ).

abcd
Double long Min , Max

IF (INIT )
THEN CPT=0 ; P=0 ; S= 1 ; RE=0
IF ((S0=S100)OR(P0=P100)
THEN ENO=1
ELSE
IF (ENO=0)
THEN IF ( SEL =0)
IF ((CPT> CYC ) AND (TEMP>0))
THEN
CPT= CPT –CYC
Min =(S0 *(TEMP – CPT) + P0 * CPT)/TEMP
Max =(S100 *(TEMP – CPT) + P100 * CPT)/TEMP
P=0 ; S=0
ELSE
P=0 ; S=1
Min =S0
Max =S100
ENDIF
ELSE
IF ((CPT< (TEMP-CYC)) AND (TEMP>0))
THEN
CPT= CPT+CYC
Min =(S0 *(TEMP – CPT) + P0 * CPT)/TEMP
Max =(S100 *(TEMP – CPT) + P100 * CPT)/TEMP
P=0 ; S=0
ELSE
P=1 ; S=0
Min =P0
Max =P100
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ( IN <= (3*MIN-2*MAX) )
RE = LOWER; //LOWER LIMIT REACHED
ENO = 1;
ELSE IF ( IN >=(2*MAX-MIN))
RE = UPPER; ////UPPER LIMIT REACHED
ENO = 1;
ELSE IF ( MIN != MAX )
RE= ((IN -MIN) *10000) /(MAX-MIN);
ELSE
ENO = 1;
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd

n value value
Inputs
IN Input function D Y -32000 to+32000 Y Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
SEL Parallel serial Selection : 1 BOOL. Y 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial N 0 Y
for Parallel; 0 for serial
Outputs
RE output function D Y -20000 to+ 20000 Y Y 0
(-200,00 to 200,00 %)
P Parallel Indicator BOOL Y 1 for Parallel; 0 for serial N Y 0
S Serial Indicator BOOL Y 1 for serial; 0 for Parallel N Y 1
ENO Error Output (Disorder or out BOOL Y 1 if Error N Y 0
of range parameters or
input).
Parame
ters
P0 parallel mode starting range D Y -32000 to+32000 N 0 Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
P100 parallel mode ending range D Y -32000 to+32000 N 1000 Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %) 0
S0 Serial mode starting range D Y -32000 to+32000 N 0 Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %)
S100 Serial mode ending range D Y -32000 to+32000 N 1000 Y
(-320,00 to 320,00 %) 0
TEMP parallel / serial commutation D Y 0 to+3600 N 1000 Y
timing. (0 to 3600 s)
62.4 SPECIFICATIONS

CPT Internal count for switching mode) I - Redundant Variable
Used for a better accuracy of commutaion
WI D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
timing
Internal parallel / serial commutation
VTEMP D Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
timing

abcd
62.4.3 Default array
PS_SPLIT_RANGE().

abcd
Section 63 PT _(D, DR, R) : FIRST ORDER TIME DELAY
PT_D, PT_DR, PT_R Specification version : 1.7 (10/06/05)
63.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
100
IN
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
Modification
of HI
100
RE
HI
LO
0
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
Modification
of LO
100
TV
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
TC
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
Example with GN = 1 and Tf = T.
63.2 FUNCTION
This function block has the Laplace Transfer Function as follows :

GN
F(s) =
1 + Tf * s
• INITIALISATION : The init value of the output is [IV], like the state variable.
operation of the Laplace Transfer Function. The filtering time constant Tf is an optional
parameter in 10ms. If no value is specified, it is assumed to be 3 * T sampling.

abcd
If the tracking command TC is set to 1 then the output RE equal to the tracking value TV
without delay, and its kept inside the limit value (HI and LO).
The output RE is limited by the high limit HI and LO limits like LO ≤ RE ≤ HI. In case of one
of these limits is reached, its internal state is kept aligned with this limit, RE equal HI or LO
and the corresponding output ( HL or LL ) is set to 1.
If the High limit value HI is inferior to low limit value LO then the output RE equal to HI and
high limit active HL and low limit active LL are set at 1.
It’s possible to modify the specific limit [HI] [LO] during operation, in this case the output is
kept between these new limits.
value value
Inputs
IN Input value Double for Y - Y - Y - -

PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.
TV Tracking value Double for Y - N LO Y - -
PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.
TC Tracking command B Y - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
RE Output value Double for N - Y - Y - IV
PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.
HL High limit active B Y - N - Y - 0
LL Low limit active B Y - N - Y - 0
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
HI High limit value Double for Y - N +∞ Y - -
PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.
LO Low limit value Double for Y - N -∞ Y - -
PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.
IV Init value Double for N - Y Y - -
PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.

abcd
value value
GN Gain value Double for N (a) N 100 Y - -
PT_D-
DR,real for
PT_R.
TF Filtering time Double for N ] 0 ; +∞ ] in N 3 x Ts Y ≥ 3 x Ts -
PT_D- time base
DR,real for = 10 ms
PT_R. 100 = 1 s
] 0 ; +20s ]
only for
PT_D
block
GAINDPT W N [0,1,2] N 0 Y
(a) The Gain value is defined as following :

Type D,W,I,L then 100 = Gain of 1.
Type R then 100 = Gain of 100.
Regarding the limitation of TF (20 s), in use of PT_D, the following schema with IT_D can be used
instead (for the “First Order” function only) :

abcd
63.4 USE :
The PT_D block has been modified to improve its precision in bode plots.
If the needs are the same than RX3i AVR targets, with a good frequency response between 10
mHz and 10 Hz, it is necessary to use PT_DR block, with has the same response than PT_R block :
the CPU time to execute the PT_DR block is 15 µs on RX3i target, regarding 11 µs for the PT_D
block on the same target.
Tf to 3 Tsampling if Tf doesn’t exist.
• Scheme :
None
None
63.5 SPECIFICATION
The output of Z-1 block is a state variable.

abcd
Internal variables : 3 booleans and 7 doubles (amongst which 3 state variables) for PT_D ;
: 3 booleans and 11 reals (amongst which 3 state
variables) for PT_DR ;
: 3 booleans and 7 reals (amongst which 3 state variables) for PT_R ;
PT_D() for PT_D, PT_R() for PT_DR and PT_R.

abcd
Section 64 PT2_D : SECOND ORDER TRANSFERT FUNCTION
PT2_D : specification version 1.1 (05/29/01)
64.1 REPRESENTATION
64.2 FUNCTION
This function block has the Laplace Transfer Function as follows :

WSP7² + GSP7 * WSP7 * s + KSP7 * s²
F(s) =
WSP7² + 2 * PSP7 * WSP7 * s + s²
• INITIALISATION : The init value of the output is [IV], like the state variable.
operation of the Laplace Transfer Function.
value value
Inputs
IN Input I,D Y 0-5000 Y Y - -

Outputs
RE Output I,D N - Y Y - IV
Parameters - - - - - - - -
WSP7 2nd order cut-off I,D N 0-1000 (a) N 0 Y - -
pulsation
GSP7 2nd order gain I,D N 0-1000 (b) N 0 Y - -
KSP7 2nd order HF gain I,D N 0-1000 (b) N 0 Y - -
PSP7 2nd order damping I,D N 0-1000 (c) N 0 Y - -
factor
IV Initial value I,D N - N 0 Y - -

abcd
(a) The Gain value is 10 : the usefull range is 0-100, with a required precision of 0.1
(B) THE GAIN VALUE IS 100 : THE USEFULL RANGE IS 0-10, WITH A REQUIRED
PRECISION OF 0.01
(c) The Gain value is 1000 : the usefull range is 0-1, with a required precision of 0.001
CONFIGURATION
None
64.4 USE
Not applicable
• Scheme :
Not applicable
None
64.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 3 doubles (amongst which 2 state variables).
PT2_D().

abcd
Section 65 R_L_FAULT : READ_LAST_FAULT
R_L_FAULT Specification version : 1.1 (05/30/01)
65.2 Function
This FB is based on C “plcc_read_last_fault” interface. This FB will return the last fault table entry of
the table specified by the IO Boolean input
The function returns a 0 if the table is empty, and return a 1 if a fault(s) is present. The NET boolean
output represents this indication.
If NET output is reset, output table is reset to.
In the Output table the long/short indicator defines the quantity of fault data present in the fault entry.
In the PLC Fault table, a long/short value of 00 represents 8 bytes of fault extra data present in the
fault entry, and 01 represent 24 bytes of fault extra data. In the I/O fault table, 02 represents 5 bytes
of fault specific data, and 03 represents 21 bytes.
The first 2 words of the exchange table are reserved for driver internal use.
Inputs:
SEL : Table Selection : 1 for I/O Fault table ; 0 for PLC Fault table
VAL : VALidate function request input
Outputs:
TABLE: Service request dialogue output TABLE
NET: Not Empty Table.

n value value
Inputs
SEL I/O Fault table or PLC Fault BOOL Y 0 PLC fault table; 1 I/O fault N 1 Y
table Selection table
VAL Demand VALidate input BOOL. Y 1=Valid demand N 1 Y
Outputs
NET Not Empty Table indicator. BOOL. Y 1=Default exchange N Y
TABLE Modbus output table (22 TW N See description below Y Y
elements)

abcd

n value value
Parame
ters

abcd
65.4 SPECIFICATIONS
Output table TABLE[22] Description :
For PLC Fault table: For I/O Fault table:
Word state (0 for PLC fault) Word state (1 for I/O fault)
Byte long_short Byte long_short
Byte reserved[3] Byte reference_adress[3]
Word PLC_fault_adress[2] Word IO_fault_adress[3]
Word fault_group Word fault_group
Word error_code Byte fault_category
Word fault specific datat[12] Byte fault_type
Word time stamp[3] Byte fault_description
Byte fault specific datat[21]
Word time stamp[3]
For more information about the last fault table description, see the API Alspa C80-35 reference
manual ALS 52102 c-en.
Internal variables : 3 booleans.
65.4.3 Default array
R_L_FAULT().

abcd
Section 66 RED_MOVE_B : REDUNDANT MOVE FOR BOOLEAN, INTEGER

AND REAL
RED_MOVE_B, RED_MOVE_I and RED_MOVE_R Specification version : 1.0 (09/27/07)
66.2 Function
Inputs :
Boolean for RED_MOVE_B : IN variable.
Integer for RED_MOVE_I : IN variable.
Real for RED_MOVE_R : IN variable.
Outputs :
Boolean for RED_MOVE_B : RE variable.
Integer for RED_MOVE_I : RE variable.
Real for RED_MOVE_R : RE variable.
Memorise the input IN in the output RE on each changing value of the input IN.
value value
Inputs
BOOLEAN IN Variable R N 0 or 1 Y - Y
REAL +-3.4 E+/- 38
Outputs
BOOLEAN RE variable R N 0 or 1 Y - Y
REAL +-3.4 E+/- 38
66.4 Use
For HMI Setpoints and Modbus Variables on head of cellule.


abcd
66.5 SPECIFICATIONS
2 booleans for RED_MOVE_B ;

2 integers for RED_MOVE_I ;
2 reals for RED_MOVE_R ;
State variables :
1 boolean for RED_MOVE_B ;

1 integer or RED_MOVE_I ;
1 real for RED_MOVE_R ;
LEA.
None.

abcd
Section 67 RTU_CONF : RTU CONF
67.1 REPRESENTATION
67.2 FUNCTION
This block is used to change the RTU (Modbus) address and optionally the configuration of
the port1 or the port 2 of the CPU310 on rack 0, slot 1 with the good firmware .
When the IN input is set to 1 (raising edge), the block changes the RTU slave address and
optionally the configuration on the card RACK=0 and SLO=0, on the port specified by the
CHA parameter (CHA=1 (port1) or CHA=2 (port2). The new RTU slave address is fixed by
the parameter SID.
The parameters are optional when not present the default values are set. When present it is
recommended to put constants.
The “change RTU_ID” communication request is not taking into account during 2 seconds
after the first cycle.
If the change is not successful, after a delay, the DF fault signal is set to 1

abcd
Name Description Type N Range Mand. Def. Mand. Advised First

e Connec value Data parameters scan
g tion value value
Inputs
VAL Validation input on B Y - Y Y -

raising edge
Outputs
DF Fault B Y - N Y - 0
Parameters - - - - - - - -
CHA Channel I N 1-2 Y Y -
SID Slave ID I N 1-255 Y Y -
DR Data Rate I N 0=300, N 6 Y -
1=600,
2=1200,
3=2400,
4=4800,
5=9600,
6=19200,
7=38400,
8=57600,
9=115200
PAR Parity I N 0=None, N 1 Y -
1=Odd,
2=Even
FC Flow Control I N 0=Hard N 1 Y
1=None
DP Duplex Mode I N 0=2-wire 1=4- N 1 Y -
wire 2=point
to point
67.4 Use
67.5 SPECIFICATIONS

INP IN at the previous cycle B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
COUNT Count for delay at init B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable

abcd
RTU_CONF().

abcd
Section 68 SAL_D : SPEED ACCELERATION LIMITOR

abcd
68.2 Function
Copyright © ALSTOM 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden

abcd
E 1 /MIN SPT
TH 0
RE L t =112 %
h =0 % Sp eed meas u re
E 2 /ME A S h=0% g reat er t h an
112%
K = 0 (1 , 2 , 4 , 6)
E 3 /SPT 1 TH
Sp eed meas u re
h=0% g reat er t h an SP T1
E 4 /SPT 2
TH
E 14 /ST
Sp eed meas u re
h=0% 1 00 g reat er t h an SP T2
E 5 /A CCT 0
TH
Fo r T s
E 6 /M SAL A CCE LE RAT IO N 0 Æ 1 00 %
CA L CUL LIM h=0%
Sp eed meas u re g reat er A c c elerat ion s peed
t h an SP T2 great er t han A C C T
O RR
E 78 /SA L MA AND S0 1 /SP A CC
1 50
E 10 /SA L M SD D EL A Y AND
N OT AND CO N
N OT AND D EL A Y
0
E 9 /SA LM D D EL A Y
CO N 0
A ccel erat io n s p eed D EL A Y
g reat er t h an A C C T O RR %
RE L
Sp eed meas u re INIT = 0 O RR

g reat er t h an 1 12 % AND
S0 2 /CL GRSA L
AND
S0 3 /SA L _ ON
N OT
E 11 /O VSPT AND O RR
Sp eed m easure
great er t han SPT 1

abcd

abcd
Name/Display Description Type Neg Range Mandator Default Mandatory Advised First
Name y Value Data parameters scan
Connecti value value
on
Inputs
E2/MEAS Speed D N 0 to 2147483647 Y Y
Measure (0 to
21474836,47 %)
E11/OVSPT Overspeed B N 1= test in N 0 Y
Test progress
Outputs
S01/SPACC Speed D N -2147483648 to N Y 0 for
Acceleration +2147483647 3s
(-21474836,48 to
+21474836,47%)
S02/CLGRSAL Closing D N 0 to 15000 Y Y 0 for
reference SAL (0 to 150,00%) 3s
S03/SAL_ON SAL On B N 1= SAL actif N Y 0 for
3s
Parameters
E1/MINSPT Min. Speed W N 0 to 65535 N 9000 Y
Measure (0 to 655,35%)
Threashold
E3/SPT1 First Speed W N 0 to 65535 N 10700 Y
Threashold (0 to 655,35%)
E4/SPT2 Second Speed W N 0 to 65535 N 10125 Y
Threashold (0 to 655,35%)
E5/ACCT Acceleration W N 0 to 65535 N 5000 Y
speed (0 to 655,35%)
Threashold
E6/MSAL SAL Setting in B N 1= order on N 1 Y
memory Order
E78/SALMA SAL setting in B N 1= authorization N 1 Y
memory
Authorization
E9/SALMD SAL Setting in W N 0 to 65535 N 10 Y
memory Delay (0 to 655,35 s)
E10/SALMSD SAL Setting in W N 0 to 65535 N 50 Y
memory Stop (0 to 655,35 s)
Delay
E14/ST Specific Time W N 0 to 65535 Y Y
(0 to 655,35 s)

abcd
68.4 Use
Not applicable
• Scheme :
Not applicable
None
68.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Internal variables : 4 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable), 1 word (amongst which 1 state
SAL_D().

abcd
Section 69 SC1STI171_DR : SCAN STI171 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT
SC1STI171_DR Specification version : 1.0 (06/28/05)
See the SME_D, SME1_D, SME1_DR Specification version : M (02/28/06) for the dividing
factor strategy (SDIV, DEFDIV with TDIV, TDIVHY).
69.2 Function
This function is used for the single shaft turbine speed measurement, with the STI171 module.
Inputs :
TS Turbine Set
ACQ Acquit for Alarm Memorisation
MS1 : Most Significant Word channel 1
LS1 : Least Significant Word channel 1

abcd

Outputs :
RE : Speed Output (%)
SP : Speed Output (RPM)
SDF : STI module Default
ENO : result validity indicator
DIS : Discordance between Channel
RE1 : Speed Output channel 1

NV1 : New Value on channel 1
OV1 : Overflow channel 1
WB1 : Wire Break detection channel 1
LSHT1: Low Speed High Threshold channel 1
NSS1: No Speed Signal channel 1

SDIV: DIV Dividing Factor request

DEFDIV: Dividing Factor Alarm
Parameterization :
NF Nominal Frequency
NS Nominal Speed
LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value
STH Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection
SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level
DIV1 Division value 1

DIV2 Division value 2
TDIV Speed for dividing factor change
TDIVHY Speed hysteresis for dividing factor change
Int Prediv
Long ValBrut1, ValBrut2, Factor, LimCpt
IF ACQ OR !TS THEN NSS1(K-1) = 0 ; NSS2(K-1) = 0
NV1 = LS1 & 0x0008 (New Value on channel 1)
OV1 = LS1 & 0x0004 (Overflow channel 1)
WB1 = !(LS1 & 0x0002 ) (Wire Break detection channel 1)
WB2 = !(LS2 & 0x0002) (Wire Break detection channel 2)

abcd
Prediv = (LS2 & 0x0001) + ((LS1 & 0x0001)*2) (Predivision and fault information)
ValBrut1 = (long (MS1) * 4096) + (LS1/16)
IF (OV1) THEN ValBrut1= ValBrut1 + 0x10000000
IF CPT1(K) < (2^31) - CYC THEN CPT1(K) = CPT1(K-1) + CYC
ENO = 0 Init Output valid
CASE PREDIV=0
SDF = 1 STI module Default
ENO = 1 Output no valid
RE1 = 120% Speed Output channel 1
LSHT1 = 0 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1
CASE PREDIV=3 Predivision factor = 1
Factor=1
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS)/ NF)*1000)/ LSTV )
CASE PREDIV=1 Predivision factor = 16 or 100

IF TYP==0
Factor=16
ELSE (TYP==1)
Factor=100
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut1)
LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV )
Factor=24
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* 24000)/ LSTV )
IF (NV1) THEN
IF CPT1(K) < LimCpt THEN LSHT1(K)=1
ELSE LSHT1(K)=0
CPT1=0
ELSE IF CPT1(K) > LimCpt
THEN LSHT1(K)=0
IF (NV2) THEN
ELSE LSHT2(K)=0

abcd
CPT2=0
THEN LSHT2(K)=0
IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)))
THEN RE(K)= 120% ; ENO = 1 (Output no valid)
ELSE IF ((WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND !(WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV2)
THEN RE(K)= RE2
ELSE IF (! (WB1 OR NSS1(K-1)) AND (WB2 OR NSS2(K-1)) AND !OV1)
THEN RE(K)= RE1
ELSE IF !(OV1 AND OV2)
THEN RE(K)= MAX(RE1,RE2)
ELSE RE(K)= 0% ; ENO = 1 (Overflow; Output no valid)
SP = (RE(K) * NS )/ 100%
IF |RE1- RE2|>SDD THEN DIS = 1
ELSE DIS = 0
IF (RE>= STH) AND TS
THEN
LimCpt=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE*NF)
IF (CPT1(K)>LimCpt) NSS1(K) =1
IF NF < 100
True table for validity result:
SDF WB1 OR NSS1(K-1) OV1 WB2 OR NSS2(K-1) OV2 ENO RE

1 X X X X 1 120 %
0 0 X 0 0 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)
1 X 0 0 0 RE2
1 X 1 X 1 120 %
0 0 0 X 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)
0 0 1 X 0 RE1
0 1 0 1 1 0%
1 X 0 1 1 0%
0 1 1 X 1 0%
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. value Mand Advised First
g Connecti . Data parameters scan
on value value
Inputs
TS Turbine Set BOOL. N Turbine Set = 1 N 0 Y

abcd
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. value Mand Advised First
g Connecti . Data parameters scan
on value value
ACQ Acquit for Alarm BOOL. N Acquit =1 N 0 Y
Memorisation
MS1 Most Significant Word W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
channel 1
LS1 Least Significant Word W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
channel 1
channel 2
channel 2
Outputs
RE Speed in % I/D. Y 0 to 30000 N Y 0
(0 to 300,00 %)
SP Speed in RPM I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0
DIS discordance BOOL. Y - N Y 0
SDF STI module Default BOOL. Y - N Y 0
ENO Result Indicator BOOL. Y 1 => RE = 120 % N - Y 0
RE1 Speed Output channel 1 I/D N 0 to 30000 N Y 0
(0 to 300,00 %)
NV1 New Value on channel 1 BOOL. N - N Y 0
OV1 Overflow channel 1 BOOL. Y - N Y 0
WB1 Wire Break detection BOOL. Y - N Y 0
channel 1
LSHT1 Low Speed High Threshold BOOL. Y - N Y 0
channel 1
NSS1 No Speed Signal channel 1 BOOL. Y - N Y 0
(0 to 300,00 %)
channel 2
channel 2
SDIV DIV dividing factor request BOOL N DIV1 Request=1 N - Y
DEFDIV Dividing factor Alarm W N 0=OK, 1= Card STI N - Y

fault, 9=TDIVx
factors faults
Parameters
NF © Nominal Frequency (Hz) D N 100 to+600 000 Y Y
(10 to 60 000Hz)
NS © Nominal Speed (rpm) I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y
LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
(rph/100) (0 to 100.00rph)
STH Speed THreshold for No I/D N 0 to 1000 N 0 Y
Speed Signal detection (0 to 10.00%)
SDD Sensor Discordance I/D N 0 to 5000 N 0 Y
Detection level (0 to 50.00%)
DIV1 Division value 1 W N 3 N 3 Y
DIV2 Division value 2 W N 100 N 100 Y
TDIV Speed for dividing factor W N 0 to 10000 N 9999 Y
change (0 to 10000 rpm)
TDIVHY Speed hysteresis for W N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
dividing factor change (0 to 10000 rpm)

abcd
69.4 Use
69.5 SPECIFICATIONS
NAME DESCRIPTION TY RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

PE
CPT1 Timer (K-1) for LSHT1 detection D 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
LSHT1 Low Speed High Threshold channel 1(K-1) B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
NSS1 No Speed Signal Channel 1 (K-1) B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
Internal variables : 14 booleans, 3 words and 8 doubles.
SC1STI171_DR().

abcd
Section 70 SCABM _D : UMT CARD INPUTS SCANNING
SCABM_D : specification version 1.2 (04/10/01)
70.1 REPRESENTATION
70.2 FUNCTION
• INITIALISATION : .

abcd
This block scans the 4 registers (64 bits) of the UMT card, in order to demultiplex the informations of
this I/O card. The UMT card sends two messages of 64 bits (4 words of 16 bits). The 63th bit is used to
differenciate the two messages (63th bit = 0 for the first message, 63th bit = 1 for the second one).
If the 63th bit is false :
15 11 Word 4 0 15 Word 3 0 15 Word 2 0 15 Word 1 0

0 N U12, U23, U31, I1, I2, I3 UST IST FR
The output [FR] is equal to the input [IN1].

The output [IST] is equal to the input [IN2].
The output [UST] is equal to the input [IN3].
The value stored in the bits 12 to 14 (max = 7) is used to demultiplex the values stored in
the bits 0 to 11 :
Value of bit 12-14 : 0 Value demultiplexed : US12
1 US23
2 US31
3 IS1
4 IS2
5 IS3
6 not used
7 not used
Endif
If the 63th bit is true :
15 Word 4 0 15 Word 3 0 15 Word 2 0 15 Word 1 0

1 Logical datas S QE S PE S PSS
The output [PSS] is equal to the input [IN1].

The output [PE] is equal to the input [IN2].
The output [QE] is equal to the input [IN3].
The output [LAG_ON] is equal to the 48th bit (sign of [IN3]).
The output [EL010] is equal to the 48th bit (1st bit of [IN4]).
The output [EL020] is equal to the 49th bit (2nd bit of [IN4]).
The output [EL030] is equal to the 50th bit (3rd bit of [IN4]).
The output [EL040] is equal to the 51th bit (4th bit of [IN4]).
The output [ALR1] is equal to the 52th bit (5th bit of [IN4]).
The output [ALR2] is equal to the 53th bit (6th bit of [IN4]).
The output [PPSS] is equal to the 54th bit (7th bit of [IN4]).
The output [MTPS] is equal to the 55th bit (8th bit of [IN4]).
The output [DFUS] is equal to the 56th bit (9th bit of [IN4]).
The output [DFIS] is equal to the 57th bit (10th bit of [IN4]).
Endif

abcd
When the first message treatment is executed, the block sends a DOIO instruction to the UMT card to
acquire the other message. Then, the precedent treatment is executed again.
Because of the non-synchronisation between the UMT card and the main application, the first message
read can either be the message 1 (63th bit = 0) or the message 2 (63th bit = 1).
The block will check that the two messages are read at each execution : if one of the two messages is
not sent by the UMT card, the output [ENO] is set to one.

abcd
ARGUMENTS CHARACTERISTICS
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input 1 I N - Y Y - -
Outputs
FR Frequency D N - Y Y - -
IST Stator current D N - Y Y - -
UST Stator voltage D N - Y Y - -
IS1 Stator current D N - N Y - -
phase U
phase V
phase W
US12 Stator voltage D N - N Y - -
phase U-V
phase V-W
phase W-U
PSS PSS set-point D N - Y Y - -
PE Active power D N - Y Y - -
QE Reactive power D N - Y Y - -
LAG_ON Reactive power < 0 B N - Y Y - -
EL010 Logical input 1 B Y - N Y - -
ALR1 Level 1 alarm B Y - N Y - -
ALR2 Level 2 alarm B Y - N Y - -
PPSS PSS presence B Y - N Y - -
MTPS PSS in mode test B Y - N Y - -
DFUS US phases fault B Y - Y Y - -
DFIS IS phases fault B Y - Y Y - -
ENO Error B Y - N Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - -
ST Start address (%AI) W Y - Y 1 Y - -
for UMT card DOIO

abcd
70.3 CONFIGURATION
None
70.4 USE
not applicable

abcd
• Scheme :
FIP PHYSICAL TREATMENTS PHYSICAL timer PHYSICAL TREATMENTS PHYSICAL FIP

INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
10ms
20ms
U A A A M M M
M L L L D D D CALL AP_MAIN
T G G G L L L
2 3 3 6 6 7
2 9 9 5 5 5
2 1 2 5 5 3
For n = 1 to 2
If bit 63 (16th bit of [IN4]) = 0 then
[FR] = [IN1]
[IST] = [IN2]
[UST] = [IN3]
Select case of value bit 12-13-14 [IN4]
case 0 : [US12] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]
case 3 : [IS1] = value bit 0 to 11 [IN4]
case else
end case
Var1 = 1
else
[PSS] = [IN1]
[PE] = [IN2]
[QE] = [IN3]
[LAG_ON] = 16th bit of [IN3]
[EL010] = 1st bit of [IN4]
[EL020] = 2nd bit of [IN4]
[EL030] = 3rd bit of [IN4]
[EL040] = 4th bit of [IN4]
[ALR1] = 5th bit of [IN4]
[ALR2] = 6th bit of [IN4]
[PPSS] = 7th bit of [IN4]
[MTPS] = 8th bit of [IN4]
[DFUS] = 9th bit of [IN4]
[DFIS] = 10th bit of [IN4]
Var2 = 1
Endif
If n = 1 then DOIO [ST] [END]

Next n
If Var1 = 0 or Var2 = 0 then [ENO] = 1

abcd
None
70.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 9 booleans, 1 word and 18 doubles.
SCABM_D().

abcd
Section 71 SCI8k_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT
SCI8k_D Specification version : 1.9 (11/07/03)
71.2 Function
This block realises a linear scaling.

The parameters OFF and GN define the value of the result RE for respectively IN=0
and IN=32000.
The binary output DF switches from 0 to1:
- if TY=0 (wire break supervision is active) AND IN is below 5920
points (3.7mA)*
or -if OFF=GN
or -if DI=1
*The binary output DF switches back to 0:

- if IN goes above 6080 points (3.8mA).(Hysteresis is 0.1mA).
value value
Inputs
IN input INT N 0 to+32000 Y Y
Pts CAD
DI Input disable BOOL Y 1 = disable N 0 Y
Outputs
–327.68% to 327.67%
DF Output Default BOOL Y 1 = invalid N Y 0
Parameters
OFF OFFSET = value for 0 I N 0 to+32000 Pts CAD Y Y
% D -320000 to+320000
Pts CAD
GN I N 0 to+32000 Pts CAD Y Y

abcd
value value
GAIN = value for 100 D -320000 to+320000
% Pts CAD
TY Type 4-20mA/ 0-10V BOOL N 0 (4-20 mA)or (2-10V)- N 0 Y
1(0-20 mA)or (0-10V)
71.4 Use
71.5 SPECIFICATIONS

Previous threshold Memorised but
TH_REP BOOL
result no redund
IF INIT THEN
DF=0 ; RE = 0
ELSE
IF ((IN>6080) OR ((IN>5920) AND(TH_REP=1)))
TH_RE=1
ELSE
TH_RE=0
IF (((TY ==0 ) AND (THRE=0 )) OR (GN == OFF) OR (DI == 1 ) ) THEN
RE = 0
DF = 1 (input invalid)
ELSE
IF (IN > 32384 (20,24mA)) THEN
IN = 32384
ENDIF
RE = ((IN-OFF)*10000) /( GN – OFF)
IF RE >32767 THEN RE = 32767 and DF = 1
IF RE <-32767 THEN RE = -32767 and DF = 1
ENDIF

abcd
TH_REP=TH_RE
ENDIF
SCI8K_D().

abcd
Section 72 SCIWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG INPUT OF

WAGO
SCIWG_D Specification version : 1.0 (10/11/05)
72.2 Function

and IN=32767.
points (3.7mA)*
or -if OFF=GN
or -if DI=1

- if IN goes above 6080 points (3.8mA).(Hysteresis is 0.1mA).
value value
Inputs
IN input INT N 0 to+32767 Y Y
Pts CAD
Outputs
RE Output D Y -32768 to+32767 Y Y 0
–327.68% to 327.67%
DF Output Default BOOL Y 1 = invalid N Y 0
Parameters
OFF OFFSET = value for 0 D N 0 to+32767 Pts CAD Y Y
%

abcd
value value
GN GAIN = value for 100 D N 0 to+32767 Pts CAD Y Y
%
TY Type 4-20mA/ 0-10V BOOL N 0 (4-20 mA)or (2-10V)- N 0 Y
1(0-20 mA)or (0-10V)
72.4 Use
72.5 SPECIFICATIONS

Previous threshold Memorised but
TH_REP BOOL
result no redund
IF INIT THEN
DF=0 ; RE = 0
ELSE
IF ((IN>6080) OR ((IN>5920) AND(TH_REP=1)))
TH_RE=1
ELSE
TH_RE=0
IF (((TY ==0 ) AND (THRE=0 )) OR (GN == OFF) OR (DI == 1 ) ) THEN
RE = 0
ELSE
IF (IN > 32767) THEN
IN = 32767
ENDIF
RE = ((IN-OFF)*10000) /( GN – OFF)
IF RE <-32768 THEN RE = -32768 and DF = 1
ENDIF

abcd
TH_REP=TH_RE
ENDIF
SCIWG_D().

abcd
Section 73 SCIX2X_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE INPUT
SCIX20_D Specification version: 1.0 (08/12/05)
73.2 Function

and IN=32767.
points (3.7mA)*
or - if OFF=GN
or - if DI=1

- if IN goes above 6226 CAD pts (3.8mA).(Hysteresis is 0.1mA (164 CAD pts).
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand. Def. Man Advised First

g Conne valu d. parameter scan
ction e Data s value value
Inputs
IN Input D N 0 to 32767 CAD Pts Y Y
DI Input disable B Y 1 = disable N 0 Y
Outputs
RE Output D Y -32768 to +32767 Y Y 0
-327.68% to 327.68%
DF Output Default B Y 1 = invalid N Y 0

abcd

Parameter
s
OFF OFFSET = Value for 0 % D N -32767 to 32767 CAD Y Y
Pts
GN GAIN = value for 100 % D N -32767 to 32767 CAD Y Y
Pts
TY Type 4-20mA B N 0 (4-20mA) or (2-10V) N 0 Y
1 (0-20mA) or (0-10V)
73.4 Use
73.5 SPECIFICATIONS

E
Memorised but not
TH_REP Previous threshold result BOOL
redound
Internal variables : 3 booleans and 1 double
if ( INIT ) THEN
RE=0; DF=0;
else
if((IN>6226) || ((IN>6062) && TH_REP)) THEN
TH_RE=1;
else
TH_RE=0;
if ( (!TYP AND (TH_RE==0)) OR (DI==1) OR (GN == OFF) THEN
RE = 0; DF = 1;
else
if ( IN > 33160) THEN // If Input > 20.4 mA
IN = 33160;
DF = 1;
ENDIF
RE=((IN-OFF)*10000)/(GN-OFF);
if ( RE > 32767 )
RE = 32767;

abcd
DF = 1;
if ( RE < -32768 )
RE = -32768;
DF = 1;
ENDIF
ENDIF
TH_REP=TH_RE;
ENDIF
SCIX20_D()

abcd
Section 74 SCMPA_(I,D) : SCAN MPA157 MODULE
SCMPA_I Specification version : 1.1 (10/27/00)

SCMPA_D Specification version : 1.1 (10/27/00)
74.2 Function
This function is used for the Alternator parameters measurement, with the MPA157 module.
Inputs :
Outputs :
URMS : RMS Voltage output (%)
DF1 : RMS Voltage output DeFault Indicator
ISC : I Sine phi or I Cosine phi output (%)
DF2 : ISC output DeFault Indicator
IST : I STator output (%)
DF3 : IST output DeFault Indicator
UGRID : Grid Voltage output (%)

abcd
DF4 : UGRID output DeFault Indicator

FREQ : Frequency output (%)
DF5 : FREQ output DeFault Indicator
MPAF : MPA Module Fault (24V)

NV : New Value
ISS : I Sine Phi Sign
ISIN : I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Indicator
Parameterization :
OFF1 OFFSET on Channel 1 (value for 0 %)
GN1 GAIN on Channel 1 = value for 100 %
OFF3 OFFSET on Channel 3(value for 0 %)
Long ValBrut,
NV = MS1 & 0x8000 (New Value)
MPAF = ! (MS1 & 0x4000) (MPA Module Fault : 24V)
ISIN = MS1 & 0x2000 (I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Indicator)
ISS = MS1 & 0x1000 (I Sine Phi Sign)
ValBrut = (MS1 & 0x0fff) * 8
IF(ValBrut > 32750) THEN DF1=1
URMS = ((ValBrut - OFF1)*10000) /( GN1 – OFF1)
ValBrut = ((LS1 & 0xfff0) / 2) & 0x7fff
ISC = ((ValBrut – OFF2)*10000) /( GN2 – OFF2)
ValBrut = (LS1 & 0x000f) * 2048 + (MS2 & 0xff00) / 32
IST = ((ValBrut – OFF3)*10000) /( GN3 – OFF3)
ValBrut = (MS2 & 0x00ff) * 128 + (LS2 & 0xf000) / 512
UGRID = ((ValBrut – OFF4)*10000) /( GN4 – OFF4)
ValBrut = (LS2 & 0x0fff) * 8
FREQ = ((ValBrut – OFF5)*10000) /( GN5 – OFF5)

g Conne value . parameter scan
ction Data s value value
Inputs

abcd

g Conne value . parameter scan
ction Data s value value
MS1 Most Significant Word channel 1 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
LS1 Least Significant Word channel 1 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
MS2 Most Significant Word channel 2 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
LS2 Least Significant Word channel 2 W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
Outputs
URMS RMS Voltage Output (%) I/D. Y 0 to 32000 N Y 0
(0 to 320,00 %)
DF1 RMS Voltage Output Default BOOL. Y - N Y 0
Indicator
ISC I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Output (%) I/D. Y 0 to 32000 N Y 0
(0 to 320,00 %)
DF2 ISC Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N - Y 0
IST I STator Output (%) I/D. Y 0 to 32000 N Y 0
(0 to 320,00 %)
DF3 IST Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0
UGRID Grid Voltage Output (%) I/D. Y 0 to 32000 N Y 0
(0 to 320,00 %)
DF4 UGRID Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0
FREQ Frequency Output (%) I/D. Y 0 to 32000 N Y 0
(0 to 320,00 %)
DF5 FREQ Output Default Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0
MPAF MPA Module Fault (24V) (1=Fault) BOOL. Y - N Y 0
NV New Value (1=New value) BOOL. Y - N Y 0
ISS I Sine Phi Sign (1 positive current) BOOL. Y - N Y 0
ISIN I Sine Phi or I Cosine Phi Indicator BOOL. Y - N Y 0
(1= sin phi; 0= Cos phi)
Parameter
s
OFF1 OFFSET = value for 0 % channel 1 I/D N 0 to+32000 Pts CAD Y Y
GN1 GAIN = value for 100 % channel 1 I/D N 6400 to+32400 Pts Y Y
CAD
CAD
CAD
CAD
CAD
74.4 Use
74.5 SPECIFICATIONS

abcd
SCMPA_D().

abcd
Section 75 SCMPM_D : MEASUREMENT PROTECTION MODULE
SCMPM_D Specification version: 1.1 (19/01/07)
75.2 Function
The main task of the SCMPM_D block is to read the status and measurements of SCMPM_D module (BW1-4):
• It trips when the trip signal is received
• It provides 4 measurements (in %)
• It indicates the cause of trip
• It set alarms when the monitoring bit doesn’t toggle

abcd
Details of 4 BusWords provided by the MPM123 module:
BusWord 1
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 to 0
AMP Tech Funct Invalid Measure 1
Fault Fault Measure
AMP = 1 : Allows to memorise the alarm

0 : Alarm is not memorised
TechFault = 1 : Technical Fault detected
0 : No Technical Fault detected
FunctFault = 1 : Functional Fault detected
0 : No Functional Fault detected
Invalid Measure = 1 : Measure Invalid
0 : Measure valid
BusWord 2
TMP Typ4 Typ3 Invalid Measure 2
Measure
TMP = 1 Allows to memorise the trip

0 Trip not memorised
Typ3/4 Type of threshold used for inputs module 3/4
0 : Static threshold (TVHx)
1 : Dynamic threshold (Thxlin)
BusWord 3
Bit 15 to 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 to 0
NumCh Invalid Measure 3
Measure
NumCh : Combination of 3 bits that indicates the cause of trip
BusWord 4
Monitoring TripOut Not Invalid Measure 4
Bit used measure
Monitoring Bit: In normal work, it changes at each bus read

TripOut = 1 Indicates a trip

abcd
Inputs :
BW1 : BusWord Channel 1 supplied by MPM123 Module
Outputs :
MEAS1 : Measurement 1 in %
VAL1 : Measurement 1 valid
N-TRIP : Indicates the Not TRIP
TChx : Trip causes by Channel x (negative logic)
TFF : Trip causes by functional fault
TTF Trip causes by technical fault
TTI Trip causes by test input
AMP : Alarm memory parameter

TMP : Trip memory parameter
TYP3 : Type of threshold used for ProIn3
TYP4 : Type of threshold used for ProIn4
FFlt : Functional fault (bad configuration)
TFlt : Technical fault (hardware fault)
Parameterisation :
OFF1 : Offset for measurement 1
GN1 : Gain for measurement 1

abcd
Connectio value . Data parameters scan
n value value
Inputs
BW1 BusWord 1 WORD N 0 to 65535 Y Y
Outputs
MEAS1 Measure in % D N -30000 to +30000 N Y 0
(-300% to +300 %)
(-300% to +300 %)
(-300% to +300 %)
(-300% to +300 %)
VAL1 Measure 1 validation BOOL Y - N Y 0
AMP Alarm memorisation BOOL. Y - N Y 0
parameter
TMP Trip memorisation BOOL. Y - N Y 0
parameter
N-TRIP N-TRIP indication BOOL. Y 0: TRIP N Y 0
1: No TRIP
TCh1 Trip caused by Channel 1 BOOL. Y 0: TRIP N Y 0
1: No TRIP
1: No TRIP
1: No TRIP
1: No TRIP
TFF Trip caused by a functional BOOL. Y - N Y 0
fault
TTF Trip caused by a technical BOOL. Y - N Y 0
fault
TTI Trip caused by a test input BOOL. Y - N Y 0
module
FFlt Functional fault (bad BOOL. Y - N Y 0
configuration)
TFlt Technical fault (hardware BOOL. Y - N Y 0
fault)
TYP3 Type of threshold used for BOOL. Y - N Y 0
Proln3 (TVH3 / InTh3) (TVH3)
TYP4 Type of threshold used for BOOL. Y - N Y 0
Proln4 (TVH4 / InTh4) (TVH4)
Parameters
OFF1 Offset for measure 1 (value D N 0 to 8191 N Y
for 0)
GN1 Gain for measure 1 (value D N 8192 to 16388 N Y
for 100 %)
for 0)

abcd
n value value
for 100 %)
for 0)
for 100 %)
for 0)
for 100 %)
75.4 Use
• NORMAL OPERATION:
(Monitoring Bit changes at each cycle)
If the Measure x is out of range (0 – 4095), then [VALx] is set to 0

Else [VALx] = NOT(Invalid Measure x) (provided by BWx)
[MEASx] = measure x in % (same calculation than sci8k() FB) According to the parameters [GNx]
and [OFFx].
If [MEASx] is out of range (due to a bad configuration of FB parameters):
• [VALx] = 0
• [MEASx] = the limit of the range (see 75.3 Arguments characteristics)
If ([GNx] < [OFFx]) or ([GNx] = [OFFx]), then [VALx] = 0
[TYP3] = Typ3
[TYP4] = Typ4
[TMP] = TMP
[AMP] = AMP
[N-TRIP] = TripOut
NumCh [TCh1] [TCh2] [TCh3] [TCh4] [TFF] [TTF] [TTI]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

abcd
• ABNORMAL OPERATION
(Monitoring Bit doesn’t toggle anymore)
[VALx] = 0
[TFlt] = 1
[FFlt] = 1
[MEASx] keep the last measurement received
[TYP3], [TYP4], [AMP], [TMP], [TRIP] keep the last state received
• PARAMETERS
[OFFx] set the value for 0 %
[GNx] set the value for 100 %
• MONITORING BIT
Monitoring Bit toggles at each cycle in normal operation
The abnormal operation is set when MB (Monitoring Bit) hasn’t toggled during 3 cycles or 15 ms.
75.5 SPECIFICATIONS
NAME DESCRIPTION TYP RANG INIT.VAL (R)

E E
Monitoring Bit (change state at
MB BOOL -
each bus read)
Memorised but no
MB_OLD Previous value of Monitoring Bit BOOL -
redundant variable
Num_Ch Cause of trip D
SCMPM_D()

abcd
Section 76 SCO8K_(I,D) : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT
SCO8k_I Specification version : 1.3 (04/04/00)

SCO8k_D Specification version : 1.3 (04/04/00)
76.2 Function
IF INIT THEN
DF=0 ; RE = 0
ELSE DF=0
IF ( (TOP == BOTT) OR (DI == 1) ) THEN
RE = 0
DF = 1 (Result invalid)
ELSE
IF (IN >32000 ) THEN
IN =32000
ELSEIF (IN <-32000 ) THEN
IN =-32000
ENDIF
RE = 32000 * (IN-BOTT) / (TOP-BOTT).
IF RE <0 THEN RE = 0 and DF = 1
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
n value value
Inputs
IN Analog input in % I/D Y -32000 to+32000 Y Y
-320.00 % to 320.00 %
Outputs
RE Output in Pts INT N 0 to+32000 pts Y Y 0
CDA
DF Output Validation BOOL Y 1= Invalid N Y 0
Parameters
TOP Value in % for I/D N -32000 to+32000 Y Y
32000 pts -320.00 % to 320.00 %
BOTT Value in % for 0 I/D N -32000 to+32000 Y Y
pts -320.00 % to 320.00 %
76.4 Use
76.5 SPECIFICATIONS
SCO_8K_D().

abcd
Section 77 SCOWG_D : SCALING FOR DISTRIBUTED ANALOG OUTPUT OF

WAGO
SCOWG_D Specification version : 1.0 (10/11/05)
77.2 Function
IF INIT THEN
DF=0 ; RE = 0
ELSE DF=0
IF ( (TOP == BOTT) OR (DI == 1) ) THEN
RE = 0
ELSE
IF (IN >32767 ) THEN
IN =32767
ELSEIF (IN <-32768 ) THEN
IN =-32768
ENDIF
RE = 32767 * (IN-BOTT) / (TOP-BOTT).
IF RE <0 THEN RE = 0 and DF = 1
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
n value value
Inputs
IN Analog input in % D Y -32768 to+32767 Y Y
-327.68 % to 327.67 %
Outputs
RE Output in Pts INT N 0 to+32767 pts Y Y 0
CDA
DF Output Validation BOOL Y 1= Invalid N Y 0
Parameters
TOP Value in % for D N -32768 to+32767 Y Y
32000 pts -327.68 % to 327.67 %
BOTT Value in % for 0 D N -32768 to+32767 Y Y
pts -327.68 % to 327.67 %
77.4 Use
77.5 SPECIFICATIONS
SCOWG_D().

abcd
Section 78 SCOX20_D : SCALING FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT
SCOX2X_D Specification version: 1.0 (08/12/05)
78.2 Function
if(INIT) THEN
RE=0; DF=0;
else DF=0;
if ((DI==1 OR (TOP == BOTT)) THEN
RE = 0;
DF = 1; // Result invalid
else
if ( IN > 32000 )
IN = 32000; DF = 1;
else if (IN < -32000 )
IN = -32000; DF = 1;
RE=((IN-BOTT)*32767)/(TOP-BOTT);
if ( RE > 32767) THEN
DF = 1;
RE = 32767;
else if ( RE < 0 ) THEN
DF = 1;
RE = 0;
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd

Inputs
IN Analog Input in % D N -32000 to +32000 Y Y
-320% to 320%
DI Input disable B Y 1 = disable N 0 Y
Outputs
RE Output in CAD Pts D N 0 to 32767 CAD Pts Y Y 0
DF Output Default B Y 1 = invalid N Y 0
Parameter
s
TOP Value in % for 32767 CAD D N -32000 to +32000 Y Y
Pts -320% to 320%
BOTT Value in % for 0 CAD Pts D N -32000 to +32000 Y Y
-320% to 320%
78.4 Use
78.5 SPECIFICATIONS

E
Internal variables : 2 booleans and 1 double
SCOX20_D()

abcd
Section 79 SCSTI1_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR SINGLE SHAFT
SCSTI1_I Specification version : 1.6 (11/26/04)

SCSTI1_D Specification version : 1.6 (11/26/04)
79.2 Function
This function is used for the single shaft turbine speed measurement, with the STI161 module.
Inputs :
TS Turbine Set
Outputs :

abcd

SP : Speed Output (RPM)


Parameterization :
NF Nominal Frequency
NS Nominal Speed
LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value
STH Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection
SDD Sensor Discordance Detection level
TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old prediv = 16 ;1 : new prediv = 100.
Int Prediv
Long ValBrut1, ValBrut2, Factor, LimCpt
WB1 = !(LS1 & 0x0002 ) (Wire Break detection channel 1)
ENO = 0 Init Output valid
CASE PREDIV=0
SDF = 1 STI module Default

abcd

Factor=1
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*1000)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS)/ NF)*1000)/ LSTV )
CASE PREDIV=1 Predivision factor = 16 or 100

IF TYP==0
Factor=16
ELSE (TYP==1)
Factor=100
SDF = 0
LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV )
Factor=24
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF)*2400)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt = ((((60000 * NS) / NF)* 24000)/ LSTV )
IF (NV1) THEN
ELSE LSHT1(K)=0
CPT1=0
THEN LSHT1(K)=0
IF (NV2) THEN
ELSE LSHT2(K)=0
CPT2=0
THEN LSHT2(K)=0
THEN RE(K)= RE2
THEN RE(K)= RE1

abcd
SP = (RE(K) * NS )/ 100%
ELSE DIS = 0
IF (RE>= STH) AND TS
THEN
LimCpt=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE*NF)
IF NF < 100

1 X X X X 1 120 %
0 0 X 0 0 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)
1 X 0 0 0 RE2
1 X 1 X 1 120 %
0 0 0 X 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)
0 0 1 X 0 RE1
0 1 0 1 1 0%
1 X 0 1 1 0%
0 1 1 X 1 0%

n value value
Inputs
Memorisation
channel 1
channel 1
channel 2
channel 2
Outputs
(0 to 300,00 %)
SP Speed in RPM I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0

abcd

n value value
(0 to 300,00 %)
channel 1
channel 1
(0 to 300,00 %)
channel 2
channel 2
Parameters
NF © Nominal Frequency (Hz) D N 100 to+600 000 Y Y
(10 to 60 000Hz)
NS © Nominal Speed (rpm) I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y
LSTV Low Speed Threshold Value I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
(rph/100) (0 to 100.00rph)
STH Speed THreshold for No I/D N 0 to 1000 N 0 Y
Detection level (0 to 50.00%)
TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old BOOL Y N 0 Y
prediv = 16 1 new prediv =
100
79.4 Use
79.5 SPECIFICATIONS
NAME DESCRIPTION TY RANGE INIT.VAL (R)

PE

abcd
SCSTI1_D().

abcd
Section 80 SCSTI2_(I,D) : SCAN STI161 MODULE FOR DOUBLE SHAFT
SCSTI2_I Specification version : 1.5 (11/26/04)

SCSTI2_D Specification version : 1.5 (11/26/04)
80.2 Function
This function is used for the double shaft turbine speed measurement, with the STI161 module.
Inputs :
TS Turbine Set

abcd
Outputs :
RE1 : Speed Output channel 1 %

SP1 : Speed Output channel 1 Rpm
RE2 : Speed Output channel 2 %

SP2 : Speed Output channel 2 Rpm
Parameterization :
SDD Sensor Discordance Detection between channels
NF1 Nominal Frequency channel 1

NS1 Nominal Speed channel 1
LSTV1 Low Speed Threshold Value channel 1
STH1 Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection channel 1
NF2 Nominal Frequency channel 2

NS2 Nominal Speed channel 2
LSTV2 Low Speed Threshold Value channel 2
STH2 Speed THreshold for No Speed Signal detection channel 2
TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old prediv = 16 ;1 : new prediv = 100.
Int Prediv
Long ValBrut1, ValBrut2, Factor, LimCpt1, LimCpt2

abcd

ENO = 0 (Init Output valid)
CASE PREDIV=0
SDF = 1 (STI module Default)
ENO = 1 (Output no valid)
CASE PREDIV=3 (Predivision factor = 1)
Factor=1
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF1)*1000)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF2)*1000)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt1 = ((((60000 * NS1)/ NF1)*1000)/ LSTV1 )
LimCpt2 = ((((60000 * NS2)/ NF2)*1000)/ LSTV2 )
CASE PREDIV=1 (Pre-division factor = 16 or 100)
IF TYP==0
Factor=16
ELSE (TYP==1)
Factor=100
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF1)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF2)* Factor *1000)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt1 = ((((60000 * NS1) / NF1)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV1 )
LimCpt2 = ((((60000 * NS2) / NF2)* Factor *1000)/ LSTV2 )
CASE PREDIV=2 (Pre-division factor = 24)
Factor=24
SDF = 0
RE1 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF1)*2400)/ ValBrut1)
RE2 (%) = ((((1%*20000000)/NF2)*2400)/ ValBrut2)
LimCpt1 = ((((60000 * NS1) / NF1)* 24000)/ LSTV1 )
LimCpt2 = ((((60000 * NS2) / NF2)* 24000)/ LSTV2 )
IF (NV1) THEN
IF CPT1(K) < LimCpt1
THEN LSHT1(K)=1
ELSE LSHT1(K)=0
CPT1=0
ELSE
IF CPT1(K) > LimCpt1
THEN LSHT1(K)=0
IF (NV2) THEN
IF CPT2(K) < LimCpt2 THEN LSHT2(K)=1
ELSE LSHT2(K)=0
CPT2=0
ELSE

abcd
IF CPT2(K) > LimCpt2

THEN LSHT2(K)=0
THEN RE(K)= RE2
THEN RE(K)= RE1
SP1 = (RE1(K) * NS1 )/ 100%
SP2 = (RE2(K) * NS2 )/ 100%
ELSE DIS = 0
IF (RE1>= STH1) AND TS
THEN
LimCpt1=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE1*NF1)
IF (CPT1(K)>LimCpt1) NSS1(K) =1
IF (RE2>= STH2) AND TS
THEN
LimCpt2=CYC + 2*Factor *(10000*10000)/(RE2*NF2)
IF (CPT2(K)>LimCpt2) NSS2(K) =1
IF NF1 < 100
IF NF1 < 100

1 X X X X 1 120 %
0 0 X 0 0 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)
1 X 0 0 0 RE2
1 X 1 X 1 120 %
0 0 0 X 0 MAX(RE1,RE2)
0 0 1 X 0 RE1
0 1 0 1 1 0%
1 X 0 1 1 0%
0 1 1 X 1 0%

abcd
n value value
Inputs
Memorisation
channel 1
channel 1
channel 2
channel 2
Outputs
(0 to 300,00 %)
(0 to 300,00 %)
SP1 Speed in RPM channel 1 I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0
channel 1
channel 1
(0 to 300,00 %)
SP2 Speed in RPM channel 2 I/D. Y 0 to+30000 RPM N Y 0
channel 2
channel 2
Parameters
Detection level channel 2 (0 to 50.00%)
NF1 © Nominal Frequency channel D N 100 to+600 000 Y Y
1 (Hz) (10 to 60 000Hz)
NS1 © Nominal Speed channel 1 I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y
(rpm)
LSTV1 Low Speed Threshold Value I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
channel 1 (rph/100) (0 to 100.00rph)
STH1 Speed THreshold for No I/D N 0 to 1000 N 0 Y
channel 1
NF2 © Nominal Frequency channel D N 100 to+600 000 Y Y
2 (Hz) (10 to 60 000Hz)
NS2 © Nominal Speed channel 2 I/D N 0 to+20000 Y Y
(rpm)
LSTV2 Low Speed Threshold Value I/D N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
channel 2 (rph/100) (0 to 100.00rph)
STH2 Speed THreshold for No I/D N 0 to 1000 N 0 Y
channel 2

abcd
n value value
TYP Old or new prediv : 0 : old BOOL Y N 0 Y
prediv = 16 1 new prediv =
100
80.4 Use
80.5 SPECIFICATIONS

SCSTI2_D().

abcd
Section 81 SELM_(D,R) : BINARY MULTIPLE SELECTION
SELM_D Specification version : 1.5 (09/30/2005)

SELM_R Specification version : 1.5 (09/30/2005)
81.1 REPRESENTATION
Priority + Priority -
Priority + Priority -
Example with P1 = 2 (SL2) ; P2 = 5 (SL5) ; P3 = 1 (SL1) ; P4 = 3 (SL3) ; P5 = 4 (SL4)

abcd
IN0
IN4
SL4 = 1
IN3
SL3 = 1
IN1
SL1 = 1
IN5
SL5 = 1
RE
IN2
SL2 = 1
81.2 FUNCTION
This function block choices with witch input [INx], the output [RE] must be updated in
function of the priority and the corresponding selection [SLx] = 1 .
The parameter [P1] is highest priority after is [P2] next 3….
If 2 value of [Px] have the same number or if one parameter is out of range, then the priority
is the default case (input1,2,3,4,5).
The input selection [SLx] valid it’s corresponding input value [INx]. If none input selection
[SLx] is equal to 1 then the output [RE] is equal to input [IN0].
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input value 1 D or R N - Y - N - -

IN2 Input value 2 D or R N - Y - N - -
IN3 Input value 3 D or R N - N 0 N - -
SL1 Selection input B Y - Y - N - -
value 1
SL2 Selection input B Y - Y - N - -
value 2
SL3 Selection input B Y - N 0 N - -
value 3
value 4
value 5

abcd
Outputs
RE Output value D or R N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
P1 Choice of selection W N [1;5] N 1 N - -
of priority 1
of priority 2
of priority 3
of priority 4
of priority 5
81.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
This block functional can be used with SEQ block for the input calculation.
81.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 5 words and 6 doubles and 5 booleans for SELM_D,

5 words and 6 reals and 5
booleans for SELM_R.
SELM_D() and SELM_R().

abcd
Section 82 SEQ : SEQUENCE FUNCTION
SEQ10, SEQ20, SEQ30, SEQ40, SEQ50, SEQ60 Specification version : 1.3 (02/01/01)
82.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
0 RE =0
TR_STEP0 = 5 TR_STEP0 = 2 TR_STEP0 = 10
2 RE =2
Go to Go to RE =10
RE = 5
5 10
RESET = 1
RESET = 1
RESET = 1 TR_STEP2 = 3
Go to RE =3
3
82.2 FUNCTION
This function block allows to sequence specific action with step number equal at 10 or 20 or
30 or 40 or 50 and maximum step number equal 60.
In each step it’s possible to reset the sequence at initial step when [RESET] = 1.
The output [RE] sends the number of active step and is updating only if the step is
stabilized.
The input [TR_STEPx] send the number of the next step after the step x. If the current step is x
and the input [TR_STEPx] is equal to x then the sequence stays at the current step x.
Example 1: [TR_STEP5] = 12 and [RE] = 5 that’s mean, the next after step 5 is 12.
Example 2: [TR_STEP5] = 5 and [RE] = 5 that’s mean, the step 5 stays active.
The output [RE_T-y] sends the historical step at each state change.
It’s possible to slide on the step without updating output [RE]. In this case, the historical
output [RE_T-y] sends the step with sign minus behind number.
Example : [RE_T-5] = - 8 that’s mean 5 sample time before the sequence sliding on step 8.
The parameter [INIT_STEP] correspond at the initial step of the block, then the output [RE]
is function of this parametre.
Example 3: [INIT_STEP] = 22 with [NB_STEP] = 30 then [RE] send the step number
betweeen 22 to 52. In this case, the input [TR_STEP1] is the transition after step 22. The
defect step is always 1000.
If the sliding is more than 10 steps without stabilization or if [TR_STEPx] is higher than
[NB_STEP], then the sequence is in defect and the current output [RE] is equal 1000. It’s
possible to leave this problem state by the reset of the sequence [RESET] = 1.

abcd

abcd
value value
Inputs
TR_STEP0 Transition from W N - Y - N - -

initial step to other
step
TR_STEPx Transition from step W N - N - N - -
x to other step until
x equal
(NB_STEP-1)
Outputs
RE Current step W N [ 0 ; 1000 ] Y - Y - -
RE_T-1 Active step 1 I N [ - 1000 ; 1000 ] N - Y - -
sample time before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
sample times
before
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
step 1
NB_STEP Number steps of W N [ 10 ; 60 ] N 10 Y - -
the sequence
INIT_STEP Initial steps number W N [ 0 ; 999 ] N 0 Y - -

abcd
82.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
This block functional can be used with SELM block for the input calculation and EQM for the
output calculation.
82.5 SPECIFICATION
• 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 words for SEQ10,
• 22 integers (amongst which 1 state variable) and 60 words for SEQ60.
SEQ10(), SEQ20(), SEQ30(), SEQ40(), SEQ50() and SEQ(60).

abcd
Section 83 SH_(D,R) : SAMPLE AND HOLD
SH_D Specification version : 1.3 (09/30/05)

SH_R Specification version : 1.3 (09/30/05)
83.1 REPRESENTATION
83.2 FUNCTION

While validity input [IC] equal 1 then the output [RE] = input [IN]. When the validity input [IC]
change from 1 to 0, the input is sample then the output [RE] equal at last input value [IN](t-1),
and after the output [RE] stays at this value as long as the validity input [IC] remains 0.
value value
Inputs
IN Input value W,I,L,D,R N - Y - Y - -

IC Valid Input B Y 1 = Input # 1 Y - N - -
valid
Outputs
RE Output result W,I,L,D,R N - Y - Y - -
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -

abcd
83.4 USE :
None
• Scheme :
None
None
83.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 1 boolean and 1 double (amongst which 1 state variable) for
SH_D.
1 boolean and 1 real (amongst which 1 state variable) for SH_R.
SH_D() and SH_R().

abcd
Section 84 SL2 : SELECTOR 2 UNITS
84.1 REPRESENTATION
84.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls a 2 units system with safety change over, circular permutation and
unit number adaptation in function of the process need.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 0, then the combination C12 is selected [C_SEL] set to
0.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the combination C21 is selected [C_SEL] set to
1.
The other outputs are set to zero.
• COMBINATION SELECTION :
The 2 combinations [C12_OPE] and [C21_OPE] are exclusives:

abcd
When the input [C12_DMD] is equal to 1, then the combination selection [C_SEL] is
seted at 0.
seted at 1.
If the 2 demands [C12_DMD] and [C21_DMD] are equal at 1 at the same time then there
is no effect on combination selection [C_SEL] , it’s stays at the last value before that.
• COMBINATION IN OPERATION :
The combination [C12_OPE] is set at 1 when combination selection [C_SEL] = 0 and
[AUTO] = 1.
[AUTO] = 1.
• NUMBER UNITS CALCULATION :
The number of units necessary is calculated in function of inputs [AUT_ON],
[AUT_OFF], [AD1_ON], and [AD1_OFF]. The number unit calculation is as following:
Number units calculation

Operator Description Name
st
IF Start 1 unit AUT_ON
AND NOT Stop all units AUT_OFF
THEN SET One unit requested NEED1 = 1
IF Stop all units AUTO_OFF
THEN RESET One unit requested NEED1 = 0
IF Start 2nd unit AD1_ON
AND NOT Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF
THEN SET Two units requested NEED2 = 1

nd
IF Stop 2 unit AD1_OFF
OR Falling edge ( Unit 1 or 2 in operation ) ↓ ( ON1 + ON2 )
OR Stop all units AUT_OFF
THEN RESET Two units requested NEED2 = 0
IF Stop order STP
THEN Number unit running requested = 99 ( remains in NB_UNIT = 99

state )
IF Two units requested NEED2
AND NOT Stop order STP
THEN Number unit running requested = 2 NB_UNIT = 2

abcd

IF One unit requested NEED1
AND NOT Two units requested NEED2

NOT
Convention : In [Cxy_OPE], the “ x letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in first and
“ y letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in second. Example [C21_OPE] indicates
that is unit 2 in first and 1 in second.
After the selection of combination [Cxy_OPE] and if [AUTO] confirms the AUTO mode,
then the [Cxy_OPE] combination is actual and the treatment varies according to
[NB_UNIT]:
- If [NB_UNIT] = 0 (Cxy_OPE), then the inactivating maintained demands for the unit x
and y are transmitted [OFFx_ORDER] and [OFFy_ORDER].
- If [NB_UNIT] = 1 (Cxy_OPE), then the activating maintained demand for the unit x is
transmitted [ONx_ORDER]. [ONx] confirms the unit x active state and reset
[ONx_ORDER] demand. Then an inactivating maintained demand for the unit y
[OFFy_ORDER] is transmitted.
- If [NB_UNIT] = 2 (Cxy_OPE), then the activating maintained demands for the unit x and
y are transmitted [ONx_ORDER] and [ONy_ORDER]. [ONx] and [ONy] confirms the
unit x and y active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] and [ONy_ORDER] demands.
- If [NB_UNIT] = 99, then units demands stays in state and no demands are transmitted.
Convention :
The“ X upper case letter ” indicates that the activating demand for the unit X has
C:Xy been made [ONx_ORDER].
The “ y lower case letter ” indicates that the inactivating demand for the unit Y
[OFFy_ORDER] is permanently maintained.
- SAFETY CHANGEOVER

abcd
If [NB_UNIT] = 1.When unit in operation fall in problem, then the change-over is made
on the first ready unit.
PBx ONy
C:Xy C:XY C:xY
OFFy_ORDER ONy_ORDER OFFx_ORDER
ONx PBy
C:Xy C:XY C:xY
- COMBINATION IN DISCREPANCY
When [NB_UNIT] = 1 and actuator Y in operation and (C:xY) combination selected, then
[DISC] information is set. Only the switch over order [PD] will return to normal operation
(C:Xy) with two times. [SO_TIME] is minimum time during the 2 units are in operation,
and [MIN_TIME] is minimum time running of 1 unit before switch-over.
( ONx since SO_TIME ) PD & ( ONy since MIN_TIME )

C:Xy C:XY C:xY
OFFy_ORDER ONx_ORDER OFFx_ORDER

DISC
PBx
C:xY
OFFx_ORDER
DISC
- COMBINATION IN PROBLEM
If the unit number is not in accordance with the units need [NB_UNIT], then the treatment
becomes in disturbance [DITS] with all order inactivated.
Disturbed calculation
IF [ Unit 1 in problem PB1
AND Unit 2 in problem PB2
AND Nb unit running requested = 1 ] NB_UNIT = 1
OR [ Unit 1 in problem PB1

(
OR Unit 2 in problem ) PB2
THEN Selector is disturbed DIST

abcd
While the unit number is not in accordance with the needs (0, 1 or 2) then the treatment
stay in the combination in problem status [DIST].
When the function is not in AUTO mode and the combination treatment is not in problem
[DIST], then all the outputs are set to zero.
If there is new combination selection ( example C12 to C21 ) then the treatment realize in
first all the process modification ( add new unit or change-over on defect ) before change
over of the combination.
If [NB_UNIT] value is equal to 99 and the treatment is not [DIST], then the treatment is
set in waiting state without changes of unit demands.
GENERATION OF ALARMS, OF VISUALISATION INFO AND MISCELLANEOUS :
[CUR_STEP] indicates the sequence current step number of the treatment.
value value
Inputs
C12_DMD Combination unit 1 B N - Y - Y - -

next 2 dmd
next 1 dmd
st
AUT_ON Start 1 unit B N - Y - Y - -
AUT_OFF Stop all unit B N - Y - Y - -
nd
AD1_ON Start 2 unit B N - Y - Y - -
nd
AD1_OFF Stop 2 unit B N - Y - Y - -
STP Stop order B N - N 0 Y - -
PD Switch over order B Y - N 0 Y - -
ON1 Unit 1 started B N - Y - Y - -
PB1 Unit 1 in problem B N - Y - Y - -
AUTO Auto mode B Y - Y - Y - -
Outputs

abcd
C_SEL Combination B N 0 = C12 sel N - Y - 0
selected 1 = C21 sel
C12_OPE Combination unit 1 B N N - Y - 0
next 2 in operation
next 1 in operation
DIST Combination B N N - Y - 0
disturbed
DISC Combination B N N - Y - 0
discrepancy
NB_UNIT Nb unit running W N N - Y - 0
requested
ON1_ORDER Starting unit 1 order B N Y - Y - 0
OFF1_ORDER Stopping unit 1 B N Y - Y - 0
order
order

abcd
value value
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
INIT Initial value B N 0 = C12 sel. N 0 Y - -
1 = C21 sel.
SO_TIME Minimum time for D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
switch over
MIN_TIME Minimum time D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
running for unit
step 1
84.4 USE
Not applicable
• Scheme :
Example of utilisation with 2 motors with 2 logic orders command.
INIT ON_TIME OFF_TIME DES_TIME RESET

MO2
A_ON_DMD
CUR_STEP
M_ON _DMD
ON_STATE
OR
REL_ON
OFF_STATE
SAF_ON
SAF_ON_STATE
A_OFF_DMD
SAF_OFF_STATE
INIT SO_TIME MIN_TIME RESET M_OFF _DMD
SL2 PROBLEM
C12_DMD REL_OFF
CUR_STEP ON_ORDER
C21_DMD SAF_OFF
C_SEL OFF ORDER
AUT_ON
C12_OPE
AUT_OFF
C21_OPE AD1_ON
DIST
AD1_OFF
DISC
STP
MO2
A_ON_DMD
CUR_STEP
M_ON _DMD
ON_STATE
OR
REL_ON
OFF_STATE
SAF_ON
SAF_ON_STATE
A_OFF_DMD
SAF_OFF_STATE
M_OFF _DMD
PROBLEM
REL_OFF
ON_ORDER
SAF_OFF
OFF ORDER

abcd
84.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 9 booleans (amongst which 2 state variables), 10 integers, 5

words (amongst which 2 state variables) and 6 doubles (amongst which 5 state variables).
SL2().

abcd
Section 85 SL3 : SELECTOR 3 UNITS
85.1 REPRESENTATION
85.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls a 3 units system with safety change over, circular permutation and
unit number adaptation in function of the process need.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 0 or <> {0,1,2} , then the combination C123 is selected
[C_SEL] set to 0 .
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the combination C231 is selected [C_SEL] set
to 1.

abcd
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 2, then the combination C312 is selected [C_SEL] set
to 2.
The other outputs are set to zero.
• COMBINATION SELECTION :
The 3 combinations [C123_OPE] , [C231_OPE] and [C312_OPE] are exclusives:
seted at 0.
seted at 1.
seted at 2.
If the 2 or 3 demands [C123_DMD] , [C231_DMD] and [C312_DMD] are equal at 1 at
the same time then there is no effect on combination selection [C_SEL] , it’s stays at the
last value before that.
• COMBINATION IN OPERATION :
[AUTO] = 1.
[AUTO] = 1.
[AUTO] = 1.
• NUMBER UNITS CALCULATION :
The number of units necessary is calculated in function of inputs [AUT_ON],
[AUT_OFF], [AD1_ON], [AD1_OFF], [AD2_ON], and [AD2_OFF]. The number unit
calculation is as following:

abcd

st
IF Start 1 unit AUT_ON
THEN SET One unit requested NEED1 = 1
IF Stop all units AUTO_OFF
THEN RESET One unit requested NEED1 = 0
IF Start 2nd unit AD1_ON
AND NOT Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF
THEN SET Two units requested NEED2 = 1
IF Stop 2nd unit AD1_OFF
THEN RESET Two units requested NEED2 = 0
IF Start 3rd unit AD2_ON
AND NOT Stop 3rd unit AD2_OFF
THEN SET Three units requested NEED3 = 1
IF Stop 3rd unit AD2_OFF
THEN RESET Three units requested NEED3 = 0
IF Stop order STP
THEN Number unit running requested = 99 ( remains in NB_UNIT = 99

state )
IF Three units requested NEED3
IF Two units requested NEED2
AND NOT Three units requested NEED3

abcd

abcd


NOT
Convention : In [Cxyz_OPE], the “ x letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in first, “ y
letter ” indicates witch unit has controlled in second and “ z letter ” indicates witch unit
has controlled in third. Example [C231_OPE] indicates that is unit 2 in first, 3 in second
and 1 in third.
After the selection of combination [Cxyz_OPE] and if [AUTO] confirms the AUTO mode,
then the [Cxyz_OPE] combination is actual and the treatment varies according to
[NB_UNIT]:
- If [NB_UNIT] = 0 (Cxyz_OPE), then the inactivating maintained demands for the unit x ,
y and z are transmitted [OFFx_ORDER], [OFFy_ORDER] and [OFFz_ORDER].
- If [NB_UNIT] = 1 (Cxyz_OPE), then the activating maintained demand for the unit x is
transmitted [ONx_ORDER]. [ONx] confirms the unit x active state and reset
[ONx_ORDER] demand. Then an inactivating maintained demand for the unit y
[OFFy_ORDER] and z [OFFz_ORDER] are transmitted.
- If [NB_UNIT] = 2 (Cxyz_OPE), then the activating maintained demand for the unit x and
y are transmitted [ONx_ORDER] [ONy_ORDER]. [ONx] and [ONy] confirms the unit x
and y active state and reset [ONx_ORDER] and [ONy_ORDER]. Then an inactivating
maintained demand for the unit z [OFFz_ORDER] is transmitted.
- If [NB_UNIT] = 3 (Cxyz_OPE), then the activating maintained demands for the unit x , y
and z are transmitted [ONx_ORDER], [ONy_ORDER] and [ONz_ORDER]. [ONx],
[ONy] and [ONz] confirm the unit x,y and z active state and reset [ONx_ORDER]
[ONy_ORDER] and [ONz_ORDER] demands.
- If [NB_UNIT] = 99, then units demands stays in state and no demands are transmitted.

abcd
Convention :
The“ X upper case letter ” indicates that the activating demand for the unit X has
C:Xyz been made [ONx_ORDER].
The “ y lower case letter ” and “ z lower case letter ” indicates that the
inactivating demand for the unit Y [OFFy_ORDER] and Z [OFFz_ORDER] are
permanently maintained.
- SAFETY CHANGEOVER
If [NB_UNIT] = 1.When unit in operation fall in problem, then the changeover is made on
the first ready unit.
PBx ONy
C:Xyz C:XYz C:xYz

OFFz_ORDER OFFz_ORDER OFFz_ORDER
PBy
ONz
C:XYZ C:xyZ
ONy_ORDER OFFx_ORDER
ONz_ORDER OFFy_ORDER
PBy ONx
C:xYz C:XYz C:Xyz
OFFx_ORDER ONx_ORDER OFFy_ORDER

PBx
ONz
C:XYZ C:xyZ
ONx_ORDER OFFx_ORDER
ONz_ORDER OFFy_ORDER
PBz ONx
C:xyZ C:XyZ C:Xyz
OFFx_ORDER ONx_ORDER OFFy_ORDER

OFFy_ORDER OFFy_ORDER OFFz_ORDER
PBx
ONy
C:XYZ C:xYz
ONx_ORDER OFFx_ORDER Rev.S

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function BlockONy_ORDER
Library PTP21A40015-en
OFFz_ORDER
abcd
If [NB_UNIT] = 2.When unit in operation fall in problem, then the changeover is made on
the first ready unit.
PBz ONy
C:XyZ C:XYZ C:XYz
OFFy_ORDER ONy_ORDER OFFz_ORDER
- COMBINATION IN DISCREPANCY
When [NB_UNIT] = 1 and actuator Y or Z in operation and (C:xYz),(C:xyZ) combination
selected, then [DISC] information is set. Only the switch over order [PD] will return to
normal operation (C:Xyz) with two times. [SO_TIME] is minimum time during the 2 units
are in operation, and [MIN_TIME] is minimum time running of 1 unit before switchover.
( ONx since SO_TIME ) PD & ( ONy since MIN_TIME )

C:Xyz C:XYz C:xYz

DISC
PBx
C:xYz
OFFx_ORDER
OFFz_ORDER
DISC
( ONx since SO_TIME ) PD & ( ONz since MIN_TIME )

C:Xyz C:XyZ C:xyZ

OFFz_ORDER OFFy_ORDER OFFy_ORDER
DISC
PBx
( ONy since SO_TIME )

C:xYz C:xYZ
OFFx_ORDER OFFx_ORDER
OFFz_ORDER ONy_ORDER
DISC DISC
PBy
C:xyZ
OFFx_ORDER
OFFy_ORDER
DISC

abcd
When [NB_UNIT] = 2 and actuator Z in operation and (C:XyZ),(C:xYZ) combination

selected, then [DISC] information is set. Only the switch over order [PD] will return to
normal operation (C:XYz) with two times. [SO_TIME] is minimum time during the 3 units
are in operation, and [MIN_TIME] is minimum time running of 1 unit before switchover.
( ONx since SO_TIME ) PD & [( ONy & ONz ) since MIN_TIME ]

C:XYz C:XYZ C:xYZ
OFFz_ORDER ONx_ORDER OFFx_ORDER

DISC
PBx
C:xYZ
OFFx_ORDER
DISC
( ONy since SO_TIME ) PD & [( ONx & ONz ) since MIN_TIME ]

C:XYz C:XYZ C:XyZ
OFFz_ORDER ONy_ORDER OFFy_ORDER

DISC
PBy
C:XyZ
OFFy_ORDER
DISC
- COMBINATION IN PROBLEM
If the unit number is not in accordance with the units need [NB_UNIT], then the treatment
becomes in disturbance [DITS] with all order inactivated.
IF [ Unit 1 in problem PB1

(
AND Unit 2 in problem ) PB2
OR Unit 1 in problem PB1

(

abcd

(
THEN Selector is disturbed DIST
While the unit number is not in accordance with the needs (0, 1 ,2 or 3) then the
treatment stay in the combination in problem status [DIST].
When the function is not in AUTO mode and the combination treatment is not in problem
[DIST], then all the outputs are set to zero.
If there is new combination selection ( example C123 to C231 ) then the treatment realize
in first all the process modification ( add new unit or changeover on defect ) before
changeover of the combination.
If [NB_UNIT] value is equal to 99 and the treatment is not [DIST], then the treatment is
set in waiting state without changes of unit demands.
In case of safety changeover when the treatment is in need 1, and 2 units are in problem
then the treatment activates the valid unit.
PBx & PBy ONz

C:Xyz C:XyZ C:xyZ
OFFy_ORDER OFFy_ORDER OFFx_ORDER

OFFz_ORDER ONz_ORDER OFFy_ORDER
GENERATION OF ALARMS, OF VISUALISATION INFO AND MISCELLANEOUS :

[CUR_STEP] indicates the sequence current step number of the treatment.

abcd
value value
Inputs

next 2 next 3 dmd
next 3 next 1 dmd
next 1 next 2 dmd
st
AUT_ON Start 1 unit B N - Y - Y - -
AUT_OFF Stop all unit B N - Y - Y - -
nd
nd
rd
rd
STP Stop order B N - N 0 Y - -
PD Switch over order B Y - N 0 Y - -
AUTO Auto mode B Y - Y - Y - -
Outputs
C_SEL Combination W N 0 = C123 sel N - Y - 0
selected 1 = C231 sel
2 = C312 sel
next 2 next 3 in
operation
next 3 next 1 in
operation
next 1 next 2 in
operation
DIST Combination B N N - Y - 0
disturbed

abcd
value value
DISC Combination B N N - Y - 0
discrepancy
NB_UNIT Nb unit running W N N - Y - 0
requested
order
order
order
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
INIT Initial value W N 0 = C123 sel. N 0 Y - -
1 = C231 sel.
2 = C312 sel.
SO_TIME Minimum time for D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
switch over
MIN_TIME Minimum time D N Unit 0.01s Y - Y - -
running for unit
step 1
85.4 USE
Not applicable

abcd
• Scheme :
Example of utilisation with 3 motors with 2 logic orders command.

MO2
A_ON_DMD
CUR_STEP
M_ON _DMD
ON_STATE
OR
REL_ON
OFF_STATE
SAF_ON
SAF_ON_STATE
A_OFF_DMD
INIT SO_TIME MIN_TIME RESET SAF_OFF_STATE
SL2 M_OFF _DMD
C123_DMD PROBLEM
CUR_STEP REL_OFF
C231_DMD ON_ORDER
C_SEL SAF_OFF
C312_DMD OFF ORDER
C123_OPE
AUT_ON INIT ON_TIME OFF_TIME DES_TIME RESET
C231_OPE MO2
AUT_OFF A_ON_DMD
C312_OPE AD1_ON CUR_STEP
DIST
M_ON _DMD
ON_STATE
OR
AD1_OFF REL_ON
DISC OFF_STATE
STP SAF_ON
SAF_ON_STATE
NB UNIT A_OFF_DMD
SAF_OFF_STATE
M_OFF _DMD
PROBLEM
REL_OFF
ON_ORDER
SAF_OFF
OFF ORDER

MO2
A_ON_DMD
CUR_STEP
M_ON _DMD
ON_STATE
OR
REL_ON
OFF_STATE
SAF_ON
SAF_ON_STATE
A_OFF_DMD
SAF_OFF_STATE
M_OFF _DMD
PROBLEM
REL_OFF
ON_ORDER
SAF_OFF
OFF ORDER

abcd
85.5 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 10 booleans (amongst which 3 state variables), 10 integers, 6

words (amongst which 2 state variables) and 8 doubles (amongst which 7 state variables).
SL3().

abcd
Section 86 SME*_ (D, DR) : SPEED MEASURE ELABORATION
SME_D, SME1_D, SME1_DR Specification version : O (08/22/08)
86.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
86.2 Function
• INITIALISATION : During initialisation of CPU the speed measure is lock at 0 during

TINIT/100 s, and until SPVx signals are valid : SPV1 for one measure, SPV1 and SPV2
for two measures and 2 of 3 among SPV1, SPV2 and SPV3 for three measures.
• NORMAL OPERATION
♦ Chanel validation (x: pour voie 1 / voie 2/ voie3) (y : pour chaîne 1/ chaîne 2)
One channel is no valid when (by priority 1 to 5):
1- Acquisition is in defect.(Hardware) (Status meas. = 10)
2 – The measure is not refresh (software) (Status meas. = 20)
3 – The increasing of speed measure is too fast. (Status meas. = 30)
4 – The decreasing of speed measure is too fast (Status meas. = 40)
5 – The measure is in discrepancy in relation to other (Status meas. = 50)
Control 10 is realized permanently on the measure connected.
Default 20 and 50 are not activated when the measure is lower than 0,25% of nominal
speed (NOM)
Default 30 and 40 are not activated when the measure is lower than parameter LOWS.
When one measure is declared in defect, it is don’t used for the elaboration of the
measure

abcd
♦ Measures elaboration
Case of three measures (3 or 2 measures valid): The measure is elaborated from the
average of X measures valid, if at least two measures are valid.
Case of two measures: The measure is elaborated from the Maximum value of two
measures.
Three elaboration are realized.
1. A raw measure elaborate as following
V = {nominal speed} * (20 MHz * {division factor}) / ( {nominal frequency} * {speed measure).
2. A filtered measure elaborate from the precedent measure(1) after a first order filter. Never used
this output for the acceleration calculation.
3. A sliding average which is the sliding average of n(Max=10) last validated measures.
♦ ELABORATION speed measure valid

This information is active is at least 2 measures on 3 are valid.
♦ ELABORATION of speed standstill

Each variable speed standstill (STDSTILx) is active when its value is lower of NTH
parameter.

abcd
Connection Value . Data parameters scan
value value
Inputs
channel 1
channel 1
SPV1 Speed Measure Validator BOOL N 0 = Fault Y -
channel 1 1 = Right Measure
MS2 Most Significant Word W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y
channel 2
LS2 Least Significant Word W N 0 to 65535 N 0 Y
channel 2
SPV2 Speed Measure Validator BOOL N 0 = Fault N 1
channel 1
channel 1
SPV3 Speed Measure Validator BOOL N 0 = Fault N 1
channel 2
channel 2
RST Acknowledge of speed BOOL. N Acquit =1 Y 0 Y
measure in fault
outputs
AVR Raw measure D N 0 to 15000 Y - Y
(0 to 150,00 %)
FLT Filtered measure D N 0 to 15000 N - Y
(0 to 150,00 %)
FLS Sliding measure D N 0 to 15000 N - Y
(0 to 150,00 %)
OM1 Value of speed measure 1 D N 0 to 15000 N - Y
(0 to 150,00 %)
(0 to 150,00 %)
(0 to 150,00 %)
VLD Speed measure valid BOOL. N Valid =1 N - Y
EINIT End of initialisation BOOL. N End=1 N - Y
SC1 Status of measure 1 D N 0 to 50 N - Y
(default type * 10)
(default type * 10)
(default type * 10)
C1VLD Speed Measure 1 Valid BOOL. N Valid =1 N - Y
STDSTIL1 Null speed 1 < NTH BOOL. N STANDSTILL =1 N - Y

abcd
value value
SDIV DIV dividing factor request BOOL N DIV1 Request=1 N - Y
DEFDIV Dividing factor Alarm W N 0=OK, 1= Card 1 N - Y

fault, 2=Card 2
fault, 3=Card1&2
faults, 9=TDIVx
factors faults
value value
Parameters
TINIT Initialisation time W N 0 to 10000 Y - Y
(0 to 100,00 s)
TFLT First order time constant W N 0 to 10000 N 3 x Ts Y ≥ 3 x Ts
(0 to 100,00 s)
NSG Number of measure for W N 0 to 10 N 2 Y
sliding
NTH Number of RPH for W N 0 to 10000 Y - Y
standstill (0 to 100,00 rpm)
DIV1 Division value 1 W N 16 or 100 (3 on Y (N on - (3 on Y
SME1_DR) SME1_DR) SME1_
DR)
DIV2 Division value 2 W N 24 (100 on Y (N on - (100 Y
SME1_DR) SME1_DR) on
SME1_
DR)
NSP Number of speed measure W N 0 to 10000 Y - Y
used (0 to 10000 rpm)
LOWS Lows speed W N 0 to 65535 Y - Y
DISC Max discrepancy beetween W N 0 to 100 Y - Y
two measure (0 to 100 rpm)
FREQ Nominal frequency W N 0 to 30000 Y - Y

(0 to 30000 Hz)
TSPEC Specific time of machine W N 0 to 10000 Y - Y
(0 to 100,00 s)
DECEL Max deceleration of W N 0 to 1000 Y - Y
machine (0 to 1000 rpm)
NOM Nominal Speed W N 0 to 10000 Y - Y
(0 to 10000 rpm)
TRNG Turning Gear Speed W N 0 to 10000 Y - Y
(0 to 10000 rpm)
FREQMF Frequency Multiplier Factor W N 1 to 10000 N 1 Y
(1,10,100,1000,
10000)
TDIV Speed for dividing factor W N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
change (0 to 10000 rpm)
TDIVHY Speed Hysteresis for W N 0 to 10000 N 0 Y
dividing factor change (0 to 10000 rpm)
86.4 USE :

abcd
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None
None
• Scheme :
None
86.5 SPECIFICATION
SME_D and SME1_D blocks are for old STI 161 cards only.
SME1_DR block is for STI171 cards : the adaptative factor is only on the STI171 card. It is possible
to use this adaptative factor only above the half of nominal speed.
It is possible to use the SME1_D or SME1_DR blocks on STI161 card : keep the default values
TDIV1 = 9999 and TDIV2 = 0 with SME1_D and TDIV = 0 with SME1_DR for this need.
• 12 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 8 words and 41 doubles (amongst which 33
state variables) for SME_D block.
• 14 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 13 words (amongst which 4 state variables) and
47 doubles (amongst which 33 state variables) for SME1_D block.
• 14 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 13 words (amongst which 4 state variables), 32
doubles (amongst which 18 state variables) and 15 reals (amongst which 15 state variables) for
SME1_DR block.
SME_D() or SME1_D() or SME1_DR().

abcd
Section 87 SNP_CONF : SNP CONF
SNP_CONF : specification version 1.0 (09/17/01)
87.1 REPRESENTATION
87.2 FUNCTION
This block is used to change the SNP address and optionally the configuration of the port1 or the
port 2 of the 351 CPU on rack 0, slot 1 with the firmware 9.11.
When the IN input is set to 1 (raising edge), the block changes the SNP slave address and
optionally the configuration on the card RACK=0 and SLO=0, on the port specified by the
CHA parameter (CHA=1 (port1) or CHA=2 (port2). The new SNP slave address is fixed by
the parameter SID.
The parameters are optional when not present the default values are set. When present it is
recommended to put constants.
The “change SNP_ID” communication request is not taking into account during 2 seconds
after the first cycle.
If the change is not successful, after a delay, the DF fault signal is set to 1

abcd
Name Description Type N Range Mand. Def. Mand. Advised First

e Connecti value Data parameters scan
g on value value
Inputs
VAL Validation input on B Y - Y Y -

raising edge
Outputs
DF Fault B Y - N Y - 0
Parameters - - - - - - - -
CHA Channel I N 1-2 Y Y -
SID Slave ID I N 1-255 Y Y -
PM Port Mode I N 0=slave, 1= N 0 Y
master
2=peer
DR Data Rate I N 0=300, N 6 Y -
1=600,
2=1200,
3=2400,
4=4800,
5=9600,
6=19200
PAR Parity I N 0=none, N 1 Y -
1=odd,
2=even
FC Flow Control I N 0=HARD N 1 Y
1=NONE
2=SOFT
TD Turnaround Delay I N 0=none, N 0 Y
1=10ms,
2=100ms,
3=500ms
TO Time out I N 0=long N 0 Y
1=medium
2=short
3=none
BPC Bits per Character I N 0=7bits N 1 Y
1=8bits
SB Stop Bits I N 0=1stopbit N 0 Y
1=2stopbits
DP Duplex Mode I N 0=2-wire N 1 Y -
1=4-wire
2=point to
point

abcd
87.4 Use
87.5 SPECIFICATIONS

INP IN at the previous cycle B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
COUNT Count for delay at init B 0 Memorisation but no Redundant Variable
SNP_CONF().

abcd
Section 88 SOL1 / SOL1W : SINGLE COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 1 LOGIC

ORDER COMMAND
88.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
88.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls a single coil solenoid valve with 1 logic order commands without
intermediate position switch.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in valve closed state
with the output [OPG_ORDER] set zero.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in valve opened state with
the output [OPG_ORDER] set to 1.
[REL_OPG] is present, the maintained valve opening order is transmitted,
[OPG_ORDER] is present. The open limit switch [OPD] confirms the valve opened
[OPG_ST].
[REL_CLG] is present, the maintained valve closing order is transmitted [OPG_ORDER]
not present. The close limit switch [CLD] confirms the valve closed [CLG_ST].
If the two demands (non-latched) [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and [A(M)_CLG_DMD] are present
at the same time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_CLG_DMD] have
priority.
demand.

abcd
condition.
- VALVE SAFETY POSITION

If safety opening (latched) [SAF_OPG] is set, the maintained valve opening order is
transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is present. the treatment becomes in safety opening state
[SAF_OPG_ST].
If safety closing (latched) [SAF_CLG] is set, the maintained valve closing order is
transmitted, [OPG_ORDER] is not present. the treatment becomes in safety closing state
[SAF_CLG_ST].
[SAF_CLG] priority.

[SAF_CLG] are no more existing, then the valve returns to normal operation.
- VALVE IN PROBLEM
If the control cell is disturbed, [DISTURB] presence, the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
If the valve is in opening [OPG_ST] or safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] and limit
[PROBLEM].
If the valve is in closing [CLG_ST] or safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] and limit
[PROBLEM].
If the valve opened limit switch is defected [OPD_DEF] or the valve closed limit switch is
defected [CLD_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the valve opened limit switch [OPD] is present at the same time than the valve closed
limit switch [CLD] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].

abcd
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the treatment set the valve [OPG_ORDER] in
the safety position defined by the [SFT] parameter
( If SFT = 1 then OPG_ORDER = 1 Else OPG_ORDER = 0 Endif ) and the other outputs
are set to zero.
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], and the problem cause is no more existing,
only the contactor return [OPD] or [CLD] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] combined
with [ACK_DMD] resets the valve in problem state and allows a return to normal
operation.
disappear.
When the treatment changes from degraded mode or safety mode to normal mode, then
it will take the corespondent functional states of the limit switch returns and set the
[OPG_ORDER] to the corespondent value .
If the valve moves after an opening or closing demand and the treatment receives the
reverse demand, then it will immediately react and accept this demand and set the
[OPG_ORDER] to the corespondent value

abcd
value value
Inputs

OPD Fdc open B N - Y - Y -
defect
CLD Fdc closed B N - Y - Y -
defect
Outputs
state
OPG_ORDER Opening order B Y Y - Y - 0
CUR_CLG_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
closing time in
decreasing way
CUR_OPG_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
opening time in
decreasing way
disengaging time in
decreasing way

abcd
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
step 1
INIT Initial value B N - Y - Y - -
SFT Safety position B N 1=opening N 0 Y - -
0=closing
response time after 100 = 1s
an closing demand
an opening demand
after an opening or
closing demand
88.4 CONFIGURATION
• TYPE SOL1A :
It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.
• TYPE SOL1B :
If [OPD] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created
outside the block.
If [CLD] mandatory connection missing then this information must be created
outside the block.
• USE :
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None

abcd
88.5 SPECIFICATION
• 8 booleans, 10 integers, 3 words (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10 doubles
(amongst which 3 state variables) for SOL1 ;
• 8 booleans, 10 integers, 6 words (amongst which 4 state variable) and 10 doubles
for SOL1W ;
SOL1().

abcd
Section 89 SOL2 / SOL2W : DUAL COIL SOLENOID VALVE WITH 2 LOGIC

ORDERS COMMAND
89.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
89.2 FUNCTION
This treatment controls a dual coil solenoid valve with 2 logic orders commands without
intermediate position switch.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to zero, then the treatment is set in valve closed state
with the output [CLG_ORDER] set to 1.
If the [INIT] parameter is equal to 1, then the treatment is set in valve opened state with
the output [OPG_ORDER] set to 1.
the valve position (the valve stays opened or closed without closing or opening orders).
[REL_OPG] is present, the valve opening order is transmitted, [OPG_ORDER]. The
open limit switch [OPD] confirms the valve opened [OPG_ST] and reset opening order
[OPG_ORDER] .
[REL_CLG] is present, the valve closing order is transmitted [CLG_ORDER]. The close
limit switch [CLD] confirms the valve closed [CLG_ST] and reset closing order
[CLG_ORDER].
If the two demands [A(M)_OPG_DMD] and [A(M)_CLG_DMD] are present at the same
time, with the corresponding release true, then [A(M)_CLG_DMD] have priority.
demand after the output [OPG_ORDER] or [CLG_ORDER] is no more present.
The orders [OPG ORDER] and [CLG_ORDER] are exculsives.
condition.
- VALVE SAFETY POSITION

If safety opening (latched) [SAF_OPG] is set, the valve opening order is transmitted,
[OPG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch open [OPD] is true. the treatment
becomes in safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] as long as safety opening
[SAF_OPG] is set.
If safety closing (latched) [SAF_CLG] is set, the valve closing order is transmitted,
[CLG_ORDER] is present until the limit switch close [CLD] is true. the treatment
becomes in safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] as long as safety closing [SAF_CLG] is
set.

abcd
[SAF_CLG] priority.
[SAF_CLG] are no more existing, then the valve returns to normal operation.
- VALVE IN PROBLEM
If the control cell is disturbed, [DISTURB] presence, the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
If the valve is in opening [OPG_ST] or safety opening state [SAF_OPG_ST] and limit
[PROBLEM].
If the valve is in closing [CLG_ST] or safety closing state [SAF_CLG_ST] and limit
[PROBLEM].
If the valve opened limit switch is defected [OPD_DEF] or the valve closed limit switch is
defected [CLD_DEF] the treatment becomes in problem [PROBLEM].
If the valve opened limit switch [OPD] is present at the same time than the valve closed
limit switch [CLD] more than 1 cycle time then the treatment becomes in problem
[PROBLEM].
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM], the valve order (closing or opening) is
If the treatment is in problem [PROBLEM] and cell is not disturbed [DISTURB] combined
with [ACK_DMD] resets the valve in problem state and allows a return to normal
operation.
disappear .

abcd
waits a demand or a limit switch return to place it in the corespondent functional states.
If the valve moves after an opening or closing demand and the treatment receives the
reverse demand, then is not accepted.

• GENERALITY :
If the input [OPD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (opening
time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the opening order is present as
long as the demand is present.
If the input [CLD] is not connected then the associate monitoring is not applied (closing
time and disengaging time are not used). In this case the closing order is present as long
as the demand is present.
value value
Inputs


abcd
OPD Fdc open B N - N (*) N -
defect
CLD Fdc closed B N - N (*) N -
defect
Outputs
state
OPG_ORDER Opening order B N Y - Y - 0
CLG_ORDER Closing order B N Y - Y - 0
CUR_CLG_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
closing time in
decreasing way
CUR_OPG_T Current value of D N N - Y - 0
opening time in
decreasing way
disengaging time in
decreasing way
Parameters - - - - - - - - -
step 1
an closing demand
an opening demand
after an opening or
closing demand

abcd
89.4 CONFIGURATION
• TYPE SOL2A :
It’s maximal I / O configuration with all position feedback.
• TYPE SOL2B or SOL2C:
If [OPD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not
applied.
If [CLD] mandatory connection missing then the sensor monitoring is not
applied.
89.5 USE :
Not applicable
• Scheme :
None
89.6 SPECIFICATION
• 11 booleans, 10 integers, 3 words (amongst which 1 state variable) and 10
doubles (amongst which 3 state variables) for SOL2 ;
• 11 booleans, 10 integers, 6 words (amongst which 4 state variables) and 10
doubles for SOL2W ;

abcd
SOL2().

abcd
Section 90 SP_D : SET POINT CALCULATION
SP_D Specification version : 1.5 ( 02/01/01)
90.1 REPRESENTATION

abcd
Example with SLOP_AUTO = 10 %/min and SLOP_MANU = 20 %/min

100
IN
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
Modificatio
n of HI
100
RE
HI
LO
0
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
Modificatio
n of LO
100
TV
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
TC
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
STOP_HIGH
STOP_LOW
T0 Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
CMD_HIGH
CMD_LOW
MANU_FBK
T0 2008. We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express
Copyright © ALSTOM Tn
T10 T20 T30 T40 T50 T60 T70 T80
AUTO mode area MANU mode area
abcd
90.2 FUNCTION
This treatment elaborates different type of analog set point :

- MST : Manual Setpoint Station.
- SPA : SetPoint Adjustable.
- SPI : SetPoint Integrator with manual input.
• INITIALIZATION (applicable on MST,SPA,SPI):
The output [RE] is set in accordance to the init value [IV] during the first scan.
The operation mode is set in accordance to the [INIT] parameters, manu mode if [INIT] =
0, and auto mode if [INIT] = 1, except SPA block is always in manu mode.
• OPERATION MODE :
There is two operation mode , auto mode and manu mode, and the manu mode have
priority on auto mode.
If the input [MANU_P] (latched) or [LOCK_AUT_P] or [MANU] (non-latched operator
dmd) is set then the operation mode manu is selected and the output [MANU_FBK] is
true.
If the block is in auto mode and the tracking command [TC] is set, the underlying mode
will be changed to manual, the output [MANU_FBK] is true. When the tracking command
[TC] is reset, the block fall back in auto mode or in manu mode in accordance with
specific conditions and the output [MANU_FBK] is false.
If there is no condition of manu mode and input [AUTO_P] (latched) or [AUTO] (non-
latched operator dmd) are set then the operation mode manu is unselected and the
output [MANU_FBK] is false.
• MANU MODE OPERATION :
In manu mode, the output [RE] is adjusted by the two input commands [CMD_HIGH] and
[CMD_LOW] according to the manu slope [SLOP_MANU] in function of type [TY]
( 0 -> %/s , 1 -> %/min) .
If commands [CMD_HIGH] and [CMD_LOW] are present at the same time then the
output [RE] stays at the last value and doesn’t move.
• AUTO MODE OPERATION :
In auto mode, the output [RE] follows the input [IN] according to the slope
[SLOP_AUTO] in function of type [TY] ( 0 -> %/s , 1 -> %/min).
The increasing of the output [RE] is lock at the last value [RE](t-1) when the input
[STOP_HIGH] is true.
The decreasing of the output [RE] is lock at the last value [RE](t-1) when the input
[STOP_LOW] is true.

abcd
• TRACKING MODE OPERATION :

If the tracking command [TC] is set, then the output [RE] follows tracking value [TV]
without delay. When the tracking command [TC] becomes false then the output [RE]
follows the input [IN] according to the slope [SLOP_AUTO] if the auto mode is selected
else the output [RE] stays at the last value and wait manu command [CMD_HIGH] and
[CMD_LOW].
• GENERAL OPERATION :
The general operations are active in any mode ( auto, manu, tracking mode).
The output [RE] is kept between the specified high [HI] and lower [LO] limits.
If the output [RE] equal high limit [HI] then the output high limit reached [HL] is set to 1.
If the output [RE] equal low limit [LO] then the output low limit reached [LL] is set to 1.
If the low limit [LO] is greater than high limit [HI] then the output [RE] is equal to high
limit and the high reached [HL] and low limit reached [LO] are set to 1.
It’s possible to modify the specific limit [HI] [LO] during operation, in this case the output
[RE] is kept between these new limits.

abcd
value value
Inputs
AUTO_P Auto process dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -

MANU_P Manu process dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -
LOCK_AUT_P Lock auto process B Y - N 0(*) Y - -
dmd
MANU Manu operator dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -
AUTO Auto operator dmd B Y - N 0(*) Y - -
IN Input I,D Y - N RE(t-1) Y - -
SLOP_AUTO Slope in auto mode W,D N %/min or N 10% = Y - -
%/s see TY 1000
STOP_HIGH Stop increasing B Y - N 0 Y - -
STOP _LOW Stop decreasing B Y - N 0 Y - -
CMD_HIGH Higher command B Y - N 0 Y -
CMD_LOW Lower command B Y - N 0 Y - -
SLOP_MANU Slope in manu W,D N %/min or N 10% = Y - -
mode %/s see TY 1000
TC Tracking command B Y - N 0 Y - -
TV Tracking value I,D Y - N 0 Y - -
Outputs
RE Output I,D Y Y Y - IV
LL Low limit active B Y N Y - -
HL High limit active B Y N Y - -
MANU_FBK Feedback manu B Y N Y - -
mode
Parameters - - - - - - - -
INIT Initial operation B Y N 0 Y 0 = manu -
mode 1 = auto
TY Slope scale B N 0-> %/s N 0 Y - -
1-> %/min
IV Initial value I,D Y N 0 Y - -
LO Low limit value I,D Y N maxi of I,D Y - -
HI High limit value I,D Y N mini of Y - -
I,D
(*) If [AUTO_P],[MANU_P],[LOCK_AUT_P] , [AUTO] and [MANU] are missing then the function
block stays in accordance to the [INIT] parameter.

abcd
90.4 CONFIGURATION
Usually, the input used is function of type of setpoint as followings:

Type MST : All outputs ,all parameters and inputs following are used.
AUTO_P, MANU_P, LOCK_AUT_P, MANU,AUTO, IN, SLOP_AUTO,
CMD_HIGH, CMD_LOW, SLOP_MANU, TC, TV.
Type SPA : All outputs ,all parameters and inputs following are used.
IN, CMD_HIGH, CMD_LOW, SLOP_MANU, TC, TV.
Type SPI : All outputs ,all parameters and inputs following are used.
AUTO_P, MANU_P, LOCK_AUT_P, IN, SLOP_AUTO, STOP_HIGH,
STOP_LOW, SLOP_MANU, TC, TV.
90.5 USE
Not applicable
• Scheme :
Operation mode scheme
TC
MANU
≥1 INIT
MANU_P S
R
LOCK_AUT_P ≥1 MANU_FBK
NOT R S
AUTO_P &
≥1
AUTO
None
90.6 SPECIFICATION
Internal variables : 15 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 7 doubles

(amongst which 1 state variable).

abcd
SP_D().

abcd
Section 91 SPEED_C : SPEED CONSIGNATOR
SPEED_C Specification version : 1.2 (04/24/02)
91.2 Function
This FB is specially specified for elaborate the speed set point with :
3 stages; 4 Temperature levels with time ratios ; 4 critical speeds ; Init from speed measurement ;
Output states for logical treatment.
S1RQ or S2RQ or S3RQ provoke set point value decreasing if this is bigger than S1S or S2S
Over speed test is possible by manual order if OST input is set.
Manual orders are possible with 2 point to point inputs : DSR and ISR, or from DCS with speed
target, SPT and pulse validation, TPV.
Stage requests, Init Command, Reset, Freeze, and pulse validation are pulse input
Inputs:
SPM : SPeed Measurement.
S1RQ : Stage 1 Request.

abcd
AUT : full AUTo Request.

DSR : Decrease Speed Request.
ISR : Increase Speed Request.
OST : Over Speed Test.
SPT : Speed Target.
STV : Speed Target Validation.
TL1 : Temperature Level 1.
IC : set point Init. on speed measurement Command.
FRZ : FReeZe set point evolution.
RST : ReSeT set point value.
Parameterization :
S1S,: Stage 1 Speed.
S1G: Stage 1 Gradient,
S1W : Stage 1 Waiting time.
S2S: Stage 2 Speed,
S2W : Stage 1 Waiting time.
S3S,: Stage 3 Speed.
MSS : Manual +/- Speed Slow slope.
MSF : Manual +/- Speed Fast slope.
CSG: Critical Speed Gradient,
C1S : Critical speed 1 Start.
C1E : Critical speed 1 End.
T1R : Temperature 1 Rising time ratio.
T1S : Temperature 1 Stage time ratio.
Outputs:
RE : output set point value.
TS1,: Target Stage 1.
S1I,: Stage 1 In progress.
S1R,: Stage 1 Reached.
WS1: Waiting time on stage 1.

abcd

WS2: Waiting time on stage 2.
DSI: Decrease Speed In progress.
FAM: Full Auto Mode.
ISI: Increase Speed In progress.
NVS: No null Value Set point.
CSI: Critical speed In progress.
ENO: Error Output (Disorder or out of range parameters or input ).
Input action function of state

No action Critical speed (CSI) SxI or FAM (up) SxI (down) Target speed in progress DSI (manual) ISI (manual)
RST X X X X X X X
FRZ X X X X X X
IC X X(not when WSx) X X X
STV X X X X
ISR X X X X
DSR X X X X X
SxRQ X X(when WSx finished) X X
AUT X X X X
IF(INIT OR RST)
THEN INTERN_ST=RE=RE10P6=0 ;
TS1=S1I=S1R=TS2=S2I=S2R=TS3=S3I=S3R=FAM=DSI=ISI=WS1=WS2= NVS=
CSI=ENO=0
IF ((C1S>C1E) OR (C2S>C2E) OR(C3S>C3E) OR(C4S>C4E)
ENO = 1 ; /*Disorder Critical speed parameters
ELSE IF( CriticalSpeed (S1S) OR CriticalSpeed (S2S) OR CriticalSpeed (S3S) OR
(S1S>100%) OR (S2S>100%) OR (S3S>100%)).
ENO = 1 /*Disorder stage speed parameters
ENDIF
IF (elaborated parameter (SxG, TxR, TxW, TxS,…)out of range)
ENO=1
ELSE
IF (ENO)
RE =0
ELSE IF (FRZ AND (INTERN_ST <100)) /*Freeze request and not critical speed
THEN /*Freeze set point evolution.
ELSE
S1I= S2I= S3I=DSI=ISI= 0
SWITCH (INTERN_ST)
Case 0 (No action)
/*Input treatment:
IF (IC) THEN NVS=1
IF (!CriticalSpeed (SPM)) RE =SPM;
ELSE IF (RE < SPM) THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM)
ELSE RE = StopCritical (SPM)
ENDIF

abcd
IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request.

THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0.
ELSEIF (STV AND (RE != SPT)) : /*Speed Target Validation.
ELSEIF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request.
ELSEIF (S1RQ)
THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM=0.
IF (RE = S1S) TS1 = 0
ELSE IF (RE < S1S)
THEN INTERN_ST= 1. /*Stage 1 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R).
IF (TL3 AND(T3R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T3R;
ELSEIF(TL2 AND(T2R!=0)) Temp= (S1G *10000)/ T2R;
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE <= S2S) INTERN_ST= 6.
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
ELSEIF (S2RQ)
IF (RE = S2S) TS2 = 0
ELSE IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ELSEIF (S3RQ)
THEN TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2=FAM=0.
ELSE IF (AUT)
THEN FAM = 1; TS1= TS2= TS3 =0.
IF (TS3 OR FAM)
IF (RE = S3S) TS3 = 0
ELSE IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;

abcd
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)

ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE IF (RE < S3S).
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
ENDCase0
Case 1 (Stage 1 Increase)
IF (S1RQ) THEN TS1=1 ; TS2=TS3=FAM=0.
IF (AUT) THEN FAM=1 ; TS1=TS2=TS3=0.
Case 101 (Stage 1 Increase And Critical speed)
S1I=1
IF ((INTERN_ST=101) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM))
THEN RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient.
CSI =1 /*Critical speed indication.
ELSE IF (DSR) . /*Decrease Speed Request.
THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0
ELSE IF (IC) THEN NVS=1
ELSE THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM)
ENDIF
ELSE IF (STV) /*Speed Target Validation.
ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request
THEN INTERN_ST=10; ; Temp=0 TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0.
ENDIF
IF ((INTERN_ST!=101) AND (INTERN_ST!=1))
BREAK
IF (INTERN_ST=1) RE=RE+ Temp (CYC) /*Stage 1 gradient.
IF (RE >= S1S)
THEN RE = S1S
IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM))
THEN INTERN_ST=101;CSI=1
ELSE INTERN_ST=1;CSI=0
IF (RE = S1S)
THEN S1R=1 ; S1I=0
IF (TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS1=0.
ELSEIF (FAM)

abcd
THEN INTERN_ST=4;
WS1=1.
IF (TL3) Temp= (S1W *T3S)/10000;
ELSEIF(TL2) Temp= (S1W *T2S)/10000;
ELSE Temp= S1W;
ENDIF
ELSEIF (TS2 OR TS3)
INTERN_ST= 2. /*Stage 2 gradient f(T1R,T2R,T3R).
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDCase1
ENDCase101
S2I=1
ELSE IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request.
ELSE IF (IC) THEN NVS=1
ELSE RE = StartCritical (SPM)
ENDIF
THEN INTERN_ST=11; Temp=0; TS1=TS2=TS3=FAM=0.
ELSE IF (ISR) /*Increase Speed Request.
THEN INTERN_ST=10; Temp=0 TS1=TS2=TS3=FAM=0.
ENDIF
BREAK
IF (RE >= S2S)
THEN RE = S2S;
ENDIF

abcd
IF (TS1) INTERN_ST=6; Temp=0; TS2= TS3=FAM=0.

IF (RE = S2S)
THEN S2R=1 ; S2I=0
ELSEIF (FAM)
THEN INTERN_ST=5;
WS2=1.
IF (TL3) Temp= (S2W *T3S)/10000;
ELSE Temp= S2W;
ENDIF
ELSEIF (TS3)
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDCase2
ENDCase102
S3I=1
ELSE IF (DSR) /*Decrease Speed Request.
THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3=0.
ELSE IF (IC) THEN
NVS=1
ELSE THEN RE = StartCritical (SPM)
ENDIF
ELSE IF (ISR)
/*Increase Speed Request.
THEN INTERN_ST=10; ; Temp=0 TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM=0.
ENDIF
BREAK

abcd

IF (RE >= S3S)
THEN RE = S3S
IF (RE = S3S)
THEN S3R=1 ; S3I=0
IF (TS3 OR FAM) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS3=0; FAM=0.
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (TS1 OR TS2).
INTERN_ST=7; Temp=0; TS3=0.
ENDIF
ENDCase3
ENDCase103
Case 4 (Waiting Stage 1)
S3R= S2R=0.
S1R= WS1=1.
/*Input treatment:
THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3=FAM=0.
ELSE IF (STV) : /*Speed Target Validation.
ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN
TS1 = 1; = TS2= TS3= FAM =0.
ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN
TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM =0.
ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN
TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2= FAM =0.
ENDIF
IF (Temp > CYC AND FAM) THEN Temp= Temp - CYC
ELSE
IF (FAM OR TS2 OR TS3).
THEN
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE
INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0; TS1= 0.
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDCase4
Case 5 (Waiting Stage 2 )

abcd
S1R= S3R=0.
S2R= WS2=1.
/*Input treatment:
THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM =0.
ELSE IF (S1RQ) THEN
TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM =0.
ELSE IF (S2RQ) THEN
TS2 = 1; TS1= TS3= FAM =0.
ELSE IF (S3RQ) THEN
TS3 = 1; TS1= TS2= FAM =0.
ENDIF
IF (Temp > CYC AND FAM) THEN Temp= Temp - CYC
ELSE
IF (TS3 OR FAM).
THEN
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE IF (TS1).
ELSE
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDCase5
Case 6 (Stage 1 Decrease)
/*Input treatment:
THEN INTERN_ST=9; Temp=0; TS1=TS2= TS3= FAM = 0.
ELSE IF (S1RQ)
THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3= FAM = 0.
ELSE IF (S2RQ)
IF (RE <= S2S)

abcd

ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ELSE IF (S3RQ)
ELSE IF (AUT)
ENDIF
IF (TS3 OR FAM)
THEN.
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE IF (RE < S3S).
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
IF(INTERN_ST!=6)
Break.
Case 106 (Stage 1 Decrease And Critical speed)
S1I=1
RE=RE-CSG(CYC) /*Critical speed gradient for decreasing stage.
IF (RE <= S1S)
THEN RE = S1S; S1R=1 ; S1I=0
ENDIF
ELSE IF (CriticalSpeed (RE))
ENDIF
ENDCase6
ENDCase106
/*Input treatment:

abcd

ELSE IF (S1RQ)
THEN TS1 = 1; TS2= TS3=0.
ELSE IF (S3RQ)
ELSE IF (AUT)
ENDIF
IF (TS3 OR FAM)
THEN.
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE IF (RE < S3S).
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
IF(INTERN_ST!=7)
Break.
Case 107 (Stage 2 Decrease And Critical speed)
S2I=1
IF (RE <= S2S)
ELSEIF (TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=6; TS2=0.
ENDIF

abcd
ENDIF
ENDCase7
ENDCase107
/*Input treatment:
ELSE IF (S1RQ)
ELSE IF (S2RQ)
ENDIF
IF(INTERN_ST!=8)
Break.
S3I=1
IF (RE <= S3S)
IF (TS3 OR FAM) THEN INTERN_ST=0; TS1=0.
ELSE IF (TS2 OR TS1) THEN INTERN_ST=7.
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDCase8
Case 9 (Manual Decrease)
/*Input treatment:
IF (IC) THEN NVS=1
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (!DSR) /* Ending Decrease Speed Request.
THEN INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0.
ENDIF
IF (ISR) /* Increase Speed Request.
ELSE IF (S1RQ)
IF (RE < S1S)

abcd

ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
ELSE IF (S2RQ)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7.
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ELSE IF (S3RQ)
ELSE IF (AUT)
ENDIF
IF (TS3 OR FAM)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE IF (RE < S3S).
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE IF (RE = S3S).
THEN INTERN_ST= 0.

abcd
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
IF(INTERN_ST!=9)
Break.
Case 109 (Manual Decrease And Critical speed)
IF(INTERN_ST=109)
RE=RE-CSG(CYC) /*Critical Slope gradient for Target speed mode.
ELSE
IF (Temp < 1000) /*1000ms
Temp = Temp+ CYC.
RE=RE-MSS(CYC) /*Manual Slow Slope gradient for 1st second order.
ELSE
RE=RE-MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient after 1st second order.
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (CriticalSpeed (RE)
IF (RE <=0%)
THEN RE = 0%;
ENDIF
ENDCase9
ENDCase109
Case 10 (Manual Increase )
/*Input treatment:
IF (IC) THEN NVS=1
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (!ISR) /* Ending Increase Speed Request.
THEN INTERN_ST=0; Temp=0.
ENDIF
ELSE IF (S1RQ)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;

abcd
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
ELSE IF (S2RQ)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ELSE IF (S3RQ)
ELSE IF (AUT)
IF (TS3 OR FAM)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE IF (RE < S3S).
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE IF (RE = S3S).
THEN INTERN_ST= 0.
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
IF(INTERN_ST!=10)
Break.
Case 110 (Manual Increase And Critical speed)

abcd
IF(INTERN_ST=110)
RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical Slope gradient for Target speed mode.
ELSE
IF (Temp < 1000) /*1000ms
Temp = Temp+ CYC.
RE=RE+MSS(CYC) /*Manual Slow Slope gradient for 1st second order.
ELSE
RE=RE+MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient after 1st second order.
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (!OST AND (RE >=100%))
THEN RE = 100%;
ELSE IF (RE >120%)
THEN RE = 120%;
ENDIF
ENDCase10
ENDCase110
Case 11 (Target In progress)
/*Input treatment:
IF (IC) THEN NVS=1
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE IF (S1RQ)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
ELSE IF (S2RQ)
IF (RE < S1S)

abcd

ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
IF (RE <= S3S) INTERN_ST= 7.
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ELSE IF (S3RQ)
ELSE IF (AUT)
ENDIF
IF (TS3 OR FAM)
IF (RE < S1S)
ELSE Temp= S1G;
ELSE IF (RE < S2S)
ELSE Temp= S2G;
ELSE IF (RE < S3S).
ELSE Temp= S3G;
ELSE IF (RE = S3S).
THEN INTERN_ST= 0.
ELSE INTERN_ST= 8.
ENDIF
IF(INTERN_ST!=11)
Break.
Case 111 (Target In progress And Critical speed)
IF ((RE < SPT) AND (OST OR (SPT<=100%)))
IF (CriticalSpeed (SPT)) SPT = StartCritical (SPT)
IF(INTERN_ST=11)
RE=RE+MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient for Target speed mode.
ELSE

abcd
RE=RE+CSG(CYC) /*Critical Slope gradient for Target speed mode.

ENDIF
IF (RE >= SPT)
THEN RE = SPT; INTERN_ST=0
ELSE IF (CriticalSpeed (RE) OR CriticalSpeed (SPM))
ENDIF
ELSEIF (RE >= SPT)
IF (CriticalSpeed (SPT)) SPT = StopCritical (SPT)
RE=RE-MSF(CYC) /*Manual Fast Slope gradient for Target speed mode.
IF (RE <= SPT)
THEN RE = SPT; INTERN_ST=0
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDCase11
ENDCase111
IF (RE = S3S) S3R=1.
ELSE IF (RE = S2S) S2R=1.
ELSE IF (RE = S1S) S1R=1.
ENDIF
ENDIF

abcd
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand Def. Mand. Advis. First

g .Con value Data Param scan
necti . value value
on
Inputs
SPM SPeed Measurement. D N 000 to+32000 ; (0,00 to 320,00 %) Y Y
S1RQ Stage 1 Request. BOOL. Y 0->1 for request N 0 Y
AUT Full auto request. BOOL. Y 0->1 for request N 0 Y
DSR Decrease Speed Request. BOOL. Y 1 for request N 0 Y
ISR Increase Speed Request. BOOL. Y 1 for request N 0 Y
OST Over Speed Test BOOL. Y 1 for request N 0 Y
SPT Speed Target D. N 0 to+12000 ; (0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y
STV Speed Target Validation BOOL. Y 0->1 for Validation N 0 Y
TL1 Temperature Level 1 for speed BOOL. Y 1 for ratio request N 0 Y
gradient and waiting time ratios .
TL2 Temperature Level 2. for speed BOOL. Y 1 for ratio request N 0 Y
TL3 Temperature Level 3. for speed BOOL. Y 1 for ratio request N 0 Y
IC set point Init. on speed BOOL. Y 0->1 for Init command. N 0 Y
measurement Command.
FRZ FReeZe set point evolution. BOOL. Y 0->1 for Freeze N 0 Y
RST ReSeT set point value BOOL. Y 0->1 for Reset N 0 Y
Output
s
RE output set point value. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0 to 120,00 %) Y Y 0
TS1 Target Stage 1. BOOL Y 1 if target set point is Stage 1 by N Y 0
S1RQ input
S1I Stage 1 In progress. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is going to Stage 1 N Y 0
S1R Stage 1 Reached. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is equal to stage 1 N Y 0
value
WS1 Waiting time on Stage 1 in BOOL Y 1 if waiting time on stage 1 ended N Y 0
progress. and no more action in progress
S2RQ input
value
WS2 Waiting time on Stage 2 in BOOL Y 1 if waiting time on stage 1 ended N Y 0
progress. and no more action in progress
S3RQ input
value
FAM Full Auto Mode in progress. BOOL Y 1 if target set point is Stage 3 by AUT N Y 0
input (with waiting stage)
DSI Decrease Speed In progress. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is decreasing by N Y 0
manual order
ISI Increase Speed In progress. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is increasing by N Y 0
manual order
NVS No null Value Set point. BOOL Y 1 if set point value is not equal to 0 N Y 0
CSI Critical speed In progress BOOL Y 1 if set point value or Speed N Y 0
measurement is in one of critical
speed ranges

abcd
Name Description Type Ne Range Mand Def. Mand. Advis. First

g .Con value Data Param scan
necti . value value
on
ENO Error Output (Disorder or out of BOOL Y 1 if Error N Y 0
range parameters or input ).
Param
e ters
S1S Stage 1 Speed. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) Y Y
S1G Stage 1 Gradient, D N 1 to+10000 ; Y Y
(0,01 to 100,00 %/min)
S1W Stage 1 Waiting time. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0 to 10000 s) N 0 Y
S2S Stage 2 Speed, D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N S1S Y
S2G Stage 2 Gradient, D N 1 to+10000 N S1G Y
(0,01 to 100,00 %/min)
S2W Stage 2 Waiting time. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0 to 10000 s) N 0 Y
S3S Stage 3 Speed. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N S2S Y
S3G Stage 3 Gradient, D N 1 to+10000 N S2G Y
(0,01 to 100,00 %/min)
MSS Manual +/- Speed Slow slope. D N 1 to+10000 N S1S Y
(0,01 to 100,00 %/min)
MSF Manual +/- Speed Fast slope. D N 1 to+10000 N MSS Y
(0,01 to 100,00 %/min)
CSG Critical Speed Gradient, D N 1 to+30000 N S1S Y
(0,01 to 300,00 %/min)
C1S Critical speed 1 Start. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y
C1E Critical speed 1 End. D N 0 to+12000 ; (0,0 to 120,00 %) N 0 Y
T1R Temperature 1 Rising time ratio. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0,0 to 100,00 %) N 1000 Y
0
T1S Temperature 1 Stage time ratio. D N 0 to+10000 ; (0,0 to 100,00 %) N 1000 Y
0
0
0
0
0
91.4 SPECIFICATIONS

TS1 Target Stage 1. B - Redundant Variable
FAM Full Auto Mode B - Redundant Variable
INTERNAL_ST Internal State variable I - Redundant Variable
RE RE memorisation D - Redundant Variable

abcd
Current Cunt down Tempo

memorisation when Fb is waiting and
Temp D - Redundant Variable
current gradient function of warming
level when increasing to stage
RE10P6 Internal count for precision D - Memorisation but no redundant variable
ENO Default output B - Memorisation but no redundant variable
Internal variables : 31 booleans (amongst which 4 state variables), 1 integer (amongst which 1 state
SPEED_C().

abcd
Section 92 TIME_METER_L : TIME METER IN SECONDS
TIME_METER_L Specification version : 1.0 (10/22/08)
92.2 Function
This block counts the seconds spent since January 1st, 1970.
INITIALIZATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal operation : it
is necessary to wait for 30 secondes the calculation of algorithm before the right value in
seconds since January 1st, 1970.
NORMAL OPERATION : The block outputs are established as follows :
• if the target is a C8075 CPU the meter LS_8075_M and MS_8075_M come from the
meters of L101FS_ANA_GLB table (LS in 1072 and MS in 1071) and are used as
inputs;
• if the target is a MFC3000 CPU the meter MFC3000_M comes from
NA001C_TIME_SEC and is used as input ;
• The memorization and/or the reset is carried out when MEM_RESET is at 1 : when the
value is at 0, the block begins to counting : When MEM_RESET is at 1, the block is
initialized with the value of meter ( LS_8075_M & MS_8075_M or MFC3000_M
regarding the target CPU where the block is used) by adding the value of the PRESET ;
• RE_MTR is the value to be reached for Meter in seconds ;
• TIME_METER is the spent time since January 1st, 1970 ;
• REM_HOUR and REM_MINUT are the remaining time until the value to reach ;
• SPEN_HOUR and SPEN_MINUT are the spending time since the beginning of the
counting of the block ;
• When the value RE_MTR is reached, the flag REAC_VALUE rises from 0 to 1 ;

abcd
value value
Inputs
LS_8075_M Input Less Word N [0 ;65535] N 0 N - -

Significant
C8075 Meter
MS_8075_M Input Most Word N [0 ;65535] N 0 N - -

Significant
C8075 Meter
MFC3000_M Input Double N [-2147483648 ; N 0 N - -

+2147483647]
MFC3000
Meter
Outputs
REAC_VALUE Flag for

reached value
[0 ;
TIME_METER Value of Long N +4294967295] N Y - -
Meter in
seconds
REM_HOUR Remaining Integer N [-32768 ; N Y - -

Hours +32767]
REM_MINUT Remaining Integer N [-32768 ; N Y - -

Minuts +32767]
SPEN_HOUR Spending Integer N [-32768 ; N Y - -

Hours +32767]
SPEN_MINUT Spending Integer N [-32768 ; N Y - -

Minuts +32767]
Parameters
MEM_RESET Memorization
and/or Reset
[0 ;
RE_MTR Value to be Long N +4294967295] Y Y - -
reached for
Meter in
seconds
PRESET Value in Long N [0 ; Y Y - -

+4294967295]
seconds to
preset

abcd
92.4 Use
It is necessary to choose the right meter variable regarding the target CPU
(L101FS_ANA_GLB for C8075 or NA001C_TIME_SEC for MFC3000).
Associated FGT :
Scheme
One state variable (a long).

• 4 words, 1 double and 8 longs ;
None.

abcd
Section 93 THR_(D,R) : THRESHOLD WITH HYSTERESIS
THR_D Specification version : 1.4 (04/11/01)

THR_R Specification version : 1.4 (04/11/01)
93.2 Function
This block detects the threshold of analog inputs sum.

INITIALIZATION : The block output is positioned in accordance with the normal operation.
NORMAL OPERATION : The block output is established as follows :
If ( [TY] = 1 ) then
|
| If ( ( ∑INn ) >= [TH] ) Then
| | RE = 1
| Else
| | If ( ( ∑INn ) > ( [TH] - [HY] ) ) & RE = 1 Then
| | | RE = 1
| | Else
| | | RE = 0
| | Endif
| Endif
Else :
| If ( ( ∑INn ) <= [TH] ) Then
| | RE = 1
| Else
| | If ( ( ∑INn ) < ( [TH] + [HY] ) ) & RE = 1 Then
| | | RE = 1
| | Else
| | | RE = 0
| | Endif

abcd
| Endif
Endif

abcd
RE
TY = 0
1
HY
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ΣIN
TH TH + HY
RE
TY = 1
HY
ΣIN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TH - HY TH
value value
Inputs
IN1 Input 1 Y Y - N - -
IN2 Input 2 ANY_NUM Y ]− ∞;+∞[ N 0 N
Outputs
RE Output or
Result
Boolean Y [0;1] Y Y - 0
Parameters
TH Threshold
value
ANY_NUM N ]− ∞;+∞[ Y Y - -
HY Hysteresis ANY_NUM N [0;+∞[ Y Y - -

value
TY Direction or
Type
Boolean N
[0;1] Y Y - -
This block can be real, integer or double integer.

IN1 to 2, TH & HY are the same type for each type of block.
RE & TY are boolean type for each type of block

abcd
93.4 Use
IN1 to 2 : INPUT : ANY_NUM input, IN1 mandatory.

RE : OUTPUT : boolean output, mandatory and memory.
TH : TRESHOLD VALUE : ANY_NUM input.
HY : HYSTERESIS VALUE : ANY_NUM input.
TY : DIRECTION or TYPE DEFINITION : boolean input.
Detection direction:
if TY = 0 falling detection, if TY = 1 rising detection
[HY] parameter must be positive, else the output will be set to the two’s
complement of [TY] parameter. This block is not an historical block.
Associated FGT :
Scheme
The ouput is a state variable.

• 2 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 3 doubles for THR_D() ;
• 2 booleans (amongst which 1 state variable) and 3 reals for THR_R() ;
THR_D() and THR_R().


abcd
Section 94 V_VIEW : VARIABLE VIEWER
V_VIEW Specification version : 1.0 (04/24/03)
94.2 Function
This function is used to view and adjust value of any variable in a diagram.
User defines in the parameter “CONFIG”, which is an array, a serie of informations that
allows to obtain the sought-after value.
Array : CONFIG
Variable type
Memory type
Address of variable
Min value
Max value
Bit position (if visualisation of a bit)
Value to put in the Watch Window (or VISUREC) for “Variable Type”:
• INTEGER : 0
• DOUBLE : 1
• BOOLEAN : 2
Value to put for “Memory Type”:
• %I : 1
• %R : 2
• % AI : 3
• %M : 4

abcd
• %Q : 5
• % AQ : 6
The minimum and maximum values allow making a linear conversion, thus precise the value
to visualise.
RES Min value of selected variable is 0, and, RES Max value of selected variable is 32 000.
Bit position is used when user wants to know, state of a bit of a word (variable with Type = 2),
or state of a boolean variable.
value value
Inputs
Outputs
RES Result I/D N 0 to 32000 pts Y - Y 0
DEFAULT Default BOOL N N - Y 0
Parameters
CONFIG Array of 6 words LONG N 0 to 65 535 Y - Y
DC Disable config BOOL N 1=disable Y - Y
94.4 Use
94.4.1 Parameters to initialise
94.4.2 Arguments description
94.4.3 Recommendations
94.5 SPECIFICATIONS :
Internal variables : None

abcd
V_VIEW ( ).


Ccad Control Function Block User Manual 3143

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ccad Control Function Block User Manual 3143

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONTROCAD

Machine Control Function Block Library

APPROVED BY H.SABOT H.S.

REFERENCE LG REV ORIGIN Format Status SH/SH N of SH

PTP21A40015 en S EMB/PCS/EE2/TC A4 GFE 1/420 420

REV CREATED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY DATE DESCRIPTION STAT.

R C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2008-05-20 New name of entity EMB GFE

S C.BARTHOULOT Ph.BOURCET H.SABOT 2008-10-22 See page 7 GFE

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Rev DATE MODIFICATIONS

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Section 34 IMPMCDWN : PULSE ON FALLING EDGE..........................................................143

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Section 70 SCABM _D : UMT CARD INPUTS SCANNING ....................................................285

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

Section 1 PRESENTATION OF THE DOCUMENT

1.1 Presentation of the technical sheets.

The technical sheet includes the following items :

- The graphical representation of the function block,

- The table of arguments characteristics,

- The FB function description ;

- The function block use description that includes :

• an optional and specific argument description,

• the parameters to be initialized,

• some notes on particular use,

- The function block specification that includes :

• the basic function used by the FB.

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

1.2 Function Block graphical representation

A function block representation is given hereafter ;

1- Name of the function block,

3- Display name (10 characters): name of the argument displayed in CONTROCAD,

- Full arrow : represent an input/output that must be wired to another FB, or

- Empty arrow : represent an optional input/output.

1.3 Table of arguments characteristics.

INPUT1 (IN1) Input B Y - Y - N - -

RE Operator result Boolean

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

The different columns contain :

NAME : name of the argument

- parameters : it is an input often connected to a tuning variable which can have 2

- Configurator : the parameters can’t be changed online

- User : the parameters can be changed online.

DESCRIPTION : description of the argument,

TYPE : a variable can have one of the following types :

- (B)OOLEAN [1 bit, 0 or 1] ANY_NUM

ANY_INT : WORD, INTEGER, LONG, DOUBLE, CURSOR

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

MANDATORY DATA : Obligation to affect a value or a variable to the argument.

1.4 General type of argument

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S

1.6 Controcad library display

CONTROCAD Machine Control Function Block Library PTP21A40015-en Rev.S